WO2003061652A1 - 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors - Google Patents

3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2003061652A1
WO2003061652A1 PCT/IB2003/000060 IB0300060W WO03061652A1 WO 2003061652 A1 WO2003061652 A1 WO 2003061652A1 IB 0300060 W IB0300060 W IB 0300060W WO 03061652 A1 WO03061652 A1 WO 03061652A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
preparation
hydrogen
optionally substituted
compound according
alkyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/IB2003/000060
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2003061652A8 (en
Inventor
Charlotte Moira Norfor Allerton
David John Bull
Mark Edward Bunnage
Robert John Maguire
John Steele
Original Assignee
Pfizer Limited
Pfizer Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from GB0201389A external-priority patent/GB0201389D0/en
Priority claimed from GB0202027A external-priority patent/GB0202027D0/en
Priority to JP2003561596A priority Critical patent/JP2005520811A/en
Priority to MXPA04006573A priority patent/MXPA04006573A/en
Priority to BR0307016-6A priority patent/BR0307016A/en
Priority to IL16267703A priority patent/IL162677A0/en
Priority to APAP/P/2004/003084A priority patent/AP2004003084A0/en
Priority to KR10-2004-7011370A priority patent/KR20040077775A/en
Application filed by Pfizer Limited, Pfizer Inc. filed Critical Pfizer Limited
Priority to CA002472238A priority patent/CA2472238A1/en
Priority to EA200400716A priority patent/EA200400716A1/en
Priority to EP03700059A priority patent/EP1467731A1/en
Publication of WO2003061652A1 publication Critical patent/WO2003061652A1/en
Priority to IS7310A priority patent/IS7310A/en
Priority to TNP2004000121A priority patent/TNSN04121A1/en
Priority to HR20040659A priority patent/HRP20040659A2/en
Priority to NO20043457A priority patent/NO20043457L/en
Publication of WO2003061652A8 publication Critical patent/WO2003061652A8/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D233/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D233/54Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D233/64Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms, e.g. histidine
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D233/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D233/54Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/02Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/04Drugs for skeletal disorders for non-specific disorders of the connective tissue
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P41/00Drugs used in surgical methods, e.g. surgery adjuvants for preventing adhesion or for vitreum substitution
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a series of novel 3-(imidazolyl)-2-( ⁇ -aminoalkyloxy)- propanoic acid derivatives that are inhibitors of TAFIa inhibitors and are useful in the treatment of disease.
  • Sophisticated mechanisms have evolved in mammals to repair the body in the event of vascular injury and so maintain hemostasis.
  • the injured blood vessel constricts to reduce the blood flow to the area, platelets aggregate to reduce the loss of blood from the area, and fibrinogen is cleaved to produce fibrin which then polymerises and forms a clot.
  • This clot covers the area of vascular damage, preventing blood loss.
  • Polymerised fibrin also provides a provisional matrix which enhances the subsequent repair process.
  • Imbalances in the blood coagulation process are thought to be at the origin of a large and disparate number of disease conditions, which are linked by an unwanted build up of fibrin.
  • the scale of fibrin build up is determined by the delicate equilibrium between the two biochemical cascades in the human body. Agents that can modulate the balance between coagulation and fibrinolysis are therefore potentially valuable in the treatment of these disease conditions.
  • ⁇ -Thrombin is the final product of the blood coagulation cascade and is responsible for the conversion of fibrinogen into fibrin.
  • ⁇ -thrombin also reduces the rate at which blood clots are broken down by the serine protease plasmin.
  • the protein that mediates this antifibrinolytic effect of ⁇ -thrombin is TAFI (Thrombin Activatable Fibrinolysis Inhibitor).
  • TAFI is a 60kDa glycoprotein found in human plasma. It is also known as procarboxypeptidase B, carboxypeptidase B, plasma carboxypeptidase B, carboxypeptidase U and carboxypeptidase R. Following initiation of the coagulation cascade it is transformed into an activated form, TAFIa, whereupon it acts upon the fibrin matrix of the developing blood clot to prevent its dissolution. TAFI circulates in normal plasma at a concentration of about 75nM in an inactive form. Thrombin converts the inactive zymogen to the active TAFI (TAFIa), a reaction that is augmented about 1250-fold by thrombomodulin.
  • TAFIa cleaves both C-terminal arginine and lysine residues from the developing fibrin clot.
  • tissue plasminogen activator tPA
  • plasminogen which is the precursor of plasmin.
  • Both tPA and plasminogen contain a structural motif called a kringle domain which binds tightly to C-terminal lysine residues. The removal of these binding sites prevents the formation of a ternary complex between tPA, plasminogen and fibrin and this inhibits the conversion of plasminogen to plasmin, thus protecting the clot from rapid degradation.
  • TAFIa In the presence of a TAFIa inhibitor, TAFIa will not be able to act upon a developing fibrin clot as described above to inhibit fibrinolysis of the clot. Thus a TAFIa inhibitor should serve to enhance fibrinolysis.
  • Inhibition was measured by the inhibitor's efficiency in protecting the active centre tyrosine and glutamic acid of bovine carboxypeptidase B from irreversible alkylation by bromoacetyl-D-arginine or bromoacetamidobutylguanidine. It is suggested that such inhibitors could act as bradykinin potentiators. Bovine enzymes of pancreatic origin are very different to those found in human plasma, so one would not expect inhibitors of one to inhibit the other. Moreover, such inhibitors are directed towards a very different utility. Accordingly this disclosure provides no teaching of TAFIa inhibitors or their utility.
  • carboxypeptidases i.e. enzymes that cleave the C-terminal amino acid from a peptide. They may be classified as acidic, neutral or basic, depending on the type of amino acid they cleave. Basic carboxypeptidases cleave arginine, lysine and histidine.
  • TAFIa is a member of a specific subset of the basic carboxypeptidases.
  • the inhibitors disclosed above by Redlitz et al. and Boffa et al. are too weak, non-specific or otherwise unsuitable to be considered as suitable TAFIa inhibitors for therapeutic application. Further, whilst the role of TAFIa in clot lysis is explained, there is no suggestion that TAFIa inhibitors can be used to treat disease.
  • US-A-5993815 teaches the use of a peptide that binds to the TAFI zymogen, thereby inhibiting its activation, to treat those disorders where a C-terminal lysine or arginine is cleaved from an intact peptide. Suitable disorders are arthritis, sepsis, thrombosis, strokes, deep vein thrombosis and myocardial infarctions.
  • the peptide used is an antibody or a functionally active fragment. The peptide should be used in an amount to promote fibrinolysis in vivo.
  • WOOO/66550 and WO00/66557 disclose broad classes of compounds useful as inhibitors of carboxypeptidase U. Inhibitors of carboxypeptidase U are postulated to facilitate fibrinolysis and thus the compounds are taught as useful in the treatment of thrombotic conditions. There is no data to support this assertion, though details of a suitable assay are given.
  • WOOO/66152 discloses formulations containing a carboxypeptidase U inhibitor and a thrombin inhibitor. Suitable carboxypeptidase U inhibitors are those of WOOO/66550. The formulations are taught as primarily useful in treating thrombotic conditions.
  • WO01/19836 discloses a series of phosphonate esters and analogues thereof as carboxypeptidase B inhibitors that are suitable for the treatment or prevention of thrombotic diseases.
  • WO02/14285 discloses a series of ⁇ -imidazolylmethyl- ⁇ -aminocarboxylic acids and derivatives that are inhibitors of TAFIa. The compounds are considered to be potentially useful in the treatment of a number of conditions.
  • the present invention discloses a further class of TAFIa inhibitors.
  • the present invention provides compounds according to general formula (I)
  • n is O, 1 , 2 or 3;
  • R 1 is selected from (a) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain d- ⁇ alkyl group, (b) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain C 2 - 6 alkenyl group,
  • Aryl is a 6-14 membered aromatic monocyclic or fused polycyclic carbocyclic group optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from R 12 , halo, OR 13 , NR 13 R 14 , NR 13 C0 2 R 12 , CO 2 R 13 , NR 13 S0 2 R 12 , CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR 13 , S(0)R 12 , S0 2 R 12 , OC(0)R 13 , S0 2 NR 13 R 14 , C(0)NR 13 R 14 , C 3 -7 cycloakyl, 0(C 3- cycloalkyl), R 15 and OR 15 , where R 12 is straight chain or branched chain C ⁇ -6 alkyl, R 13 and R 14 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain C ⁇ -6 alkyl, and R 15 is phenyl optionally substituted by R 12 , OR 13 , halo or haloalkyl; Aromatic heterocycle
  • Halo includes fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo groups.
  • Haloalkyl includes monohaloalkyl, polyhaloalkyl and perhaloalkyl, such as 2-bromoethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, chlorodifluoromethyl and trichloromethyl.
  • alkyl includes straight chain and branched chain alkyl.
  • the R 1 group and C(R 2 )(R 3 )(amino acid) group may be attached at any atom of the imidazole ring that is available to form a covalent bond, and that it is not intended that the general formula should be interpreted as limiting the R 1 group to the C 2 - and / ⁇ -positions, nor the C(R 2 )(R 3 )(amino acid) group to the C 4 - and C ⁇ -positions.
  • the two groups cannot both be attached to the same atom of the imidazole ring, and that only one of the nitrogen atoms (by convention designated N 1 ) of the imidazole ring is available to form a covalent bond.
  • N 1 nitrogen atoms
  • the possible substitution patterns are 1 ,2-; 1 ,4-; 1 ,5-; 2,4- and 2,5-.
  • Certain compounds according to formula (I) may exist in more than one tautomeric form. If the imidazole of general formula (I) is substituted at the 2- and 4-positions the 2,4-disubstituted imidazole can tautomerise to form the corresponding 2,5- disubstituted imidazole. Furthermore, where a compound includes an Aromatic heterocyle that is substituted with a hydroxyl group it may exist as the 'keto' tautomer. The tautomeric relationship between 2-hydroxypyridine and 2-pyridone is a well known example of this phenomenon. All such tautomers of compounds of formula (I), including mixtures thereof, are included in the scope of the present invention.
  • the compounds of formula (I) contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms (chiral centers) and can therefore exist in two or more optical stereoisomeric forms such as enantiomers, diastereomers and epimers. Where the compounds of formula (I) contain a carbon-carbon double bond, cis (Z) / trans (E) stereoisomerism may also occur. All such individual stereoisomers of the compounds of formula (I) and mixtures thereof, including racemates, are included in the scope of the present invention.
  • Individual stereoisomers may be separated from mixtures by conventional techniques such as, for example, by fractional crystallization or by chromatography of the mixture of compounds or of a suitable salt or derivative thereof.
  • individual enantiomers of the compounds of formula (I) may be prepared by resolution, such as by H.P.L.C. of the corresponding racemate using a suitable chiral support or by fractional crystallisation of the diastereoisomeric salts formed by reaction of the corresponding racemate with a suitable optically active acid or base, as appropriate.
  • the individual enantiomers may also be obtained from a corresponding optically pure intermediate prepared by such a resolution method.
  • the compounds of formula (I) have both acidic and basic functional groups. Therefore, in addition to the uncharged form depicted in the general formula, they may exist as internal salts (zwitterions). Furthermore, they may form pharmaceutically acceptable salts with acids and bases. Such zwitterions and salts are included within the scope of the invention.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of the formula (I) may be readily prepared by mixing together solutions of a compound of the formula (I) and the desired acid or base, as appropriate.
  • the salt may precipitate from solution and be collected by filtration or may be recovered by evaporation of the solvent.
  • Salts may also be prepared by ion exchange, such as by equilibrating a solution of a compound of formula (I) with an appropriate ion exchange resin. Ion exchange may also be used to convert one salt form of a compound of formula (I), such as a salt with an acid or base that is not pharmaceutically acceptable, to another salt form. These methods are generally well known in the art.
  • Suitable acid addition salts are formed from acids which form non-toxic salts and examples are the hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, sulfate, bisulfate, nitrate, phosphate, hydrogen phosphate, acetate, maleate, fumarate, lactate, tartrate, citrate, gluconate, succinate, saccharate, benzoate, methanesulphonate, ethanesulphonate, benzenesulphonate, p-toluenesulphonate and pamoate salts.
  • Suitable base salts are formed from bases which form non-toxic salts and examples are the sodium, potassium, aluminium, calcium, magnesium, zinc and diethanolamine salts.
  • the compounds of formula (I) may form pharmaceutically acceptable solvates (including hydrates). These solvates are also included in the scope of the present invention.
  • the compounds of formula (I) may exist in one or more crystalline forms. These polymorphs, including mixtures thereof are also included within the scope of the present invention.
  • Suitable prodrugs are discussed in Drugs of Today 1983, 19, 499-538 and Annual Reports in Medicinal Chemistry 1975, 70, 306-326.
  • the absolute stereochemistry of the compounds of formula (I) may be as depicted in formula (IA) or formula (IB) below.
  • the absolute stereochemistry at the chiral center of (IA) is designated as 'S and that of (IB) is 'R.
  • the compounds of formula (IA) are particularly preferred.
  • Preferred compounds of formula (I) include those where the imidazole is substituted at the C 2 or C 4 positions by the C(R )(R 3 )(amino acid) group to give compounds of formulae (IC) and (ID) respectively. Particularly preferred are those compounds of formula (I) where R 1 is attached at the C 4 position of the imidazole moiety and the C(R 2 )(R 3 )(amino acid) group is attached at the C 2 position so as to give the 2,4-disubstituted imidazole of formula (IC 1 ) or where R 1 is attached at the N 1 position of the imidazole moiety and the C(R 2 )(R 3 )(amino acid) group is attached at the C 4 position so as to give the 1 ,4-disubstituted imidazole of formula (ID 1 ).
  • n is 0 or 1. More preferably n is 0.
  • R 1 is hydrogen, Aryl, or a C1-6 alkyl or C 2 - ⁇ alkenyl group optionally substituted by one or more groups selected from C 3 . 7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, Heterocycle, OR 10 , NR 10 R 11 , S(0) p R 1 °, OC(0)R 1 ⁇ C0 2 R 1 °, CONR 10 R 11 , SO 2 NR 10 R 11 , halo and NHS0 2 R 1 °. More preferably R 1 is hydrogen, Aryl, C 2-6 alkenyl or a Ci- 6 alkyl group optionally substituted by one or more groups selected from C 3 .
  • R 1 is hydrogen, Aryl or a Ci- 6 alkyl group optionally substituted by a group selected from C 3 . 7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, OR 10 , C0 2 R 1 ° and NHS0 2 R 10 .
  • R 1 is hydrogen, Aryl or a Ci- ⁇ alkyl group optionally substituted by a group selected from cydohexyl and Aryl.
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C ⁇ -3 alkyl. Most preferably R 1 is hydrogen.
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from hydrogen and C ⁇ -6 alkyl. More preferably R 2 and R 3 are hydrogen.
  • R 4 is hydrogen or C ⁇ - 6 alkyl. More preferably R 4 is hydrogen.
  • R 6 , R 7 and R 9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and Ci-6 alkyl. More preferably R 6 , R 7 and R 9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and C 1 -3 alkyl. Yet more preferably R 6 , R 7 and R 9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and methyl. Most preferably R 6 , R 7 and R 9 are all hydrogen.
  • R 5 and R 8 do not constitute a C 2-6 alkylene link then R 5 is preferably hydrogen or C-i- 6 alkyl, more preferably hydrogen or C ⁇ -3 alkyl, yet more preferably hydrogen or methyl, and most preferably methyl, and R 8 is preferably hydrogen or C ⁇ - 6 alkyl, more preferably hydrogen or C- ⁇ - 3 alkyl, yet more preferably hydrogen or methyl, and most preferably hydrogen.
  • R 5 and R 8 constitute a C 2 - 6 alkylene link then the link is preferably a C2- 3 alkylene link and more preferably it is a C 2 alkylene link.
  • R 10 and R 11 are each independently selected from hydrogen and C 1 . 3 aallkkyyll.. MMoonre preferably R 10 and R 11 are each independently selected from hydrogen and methyl
  • Aryl includes optionally substituted phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl and phenanthrenyl.
  • Aryl is phenyl or naphthyl optionally substituted by 1 -3 groups selected from R 12 , halo, OR 13 , NR 13 R 14 , NR 13 C0 2 R 12 , C0 2 R 13 , NR 13 S0 2 R 12 , CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR 13 , S(0)R 12 , S0 2 R 12 , OC(0)R 13 , S0 2 NR 13 R 14 , C(0)NR 13 R 14 , C 3 - 7 cycloakyl, O(C 3-7 cycloalkyl), R 15 and OR 15 .
  • Aryl is phenyl optionally substituted by C ⁇ -6 alkyl, halo, 0(C ⁇ -6 alkyl), CF 3 , C 3 - 7 cycloakyl, 0(C 3-7 cycloalkyl), R 15 or OR 15 and R 15 is phenyl optionally substituted by C 1-6 alkyl, halo, 0(d. 6 alkyl) or CF 3 .
  • Aryl is phenyl optionally substituted by Ci- ⁇ alkyl, CF 3 , cydohexyl, O(cyclohexyl), R 15 or OR 15 and R 15 is phenyl optionally substituted by C ⁇ -6 alkyl, Cl, F, 0(C ⁇ -6 alkyl) or CF 3 .
  • Aryl is phenyl.
  • Aromatic heterocycle is a 5 or 6 membered aromatic ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms each independently selected from O, S and N, including optionally substituted furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, triazolyl, pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and triazinyl, optionally substituted by 1-3 groups selected from OR 13 , NR 13 R 14 , C0 2 R 13 , NR 13 C0 2 R 12 , R 12 , halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR 13 , S(O)R 12 , S0 2 R 12 , OC(O)R 13 , NR 13 S0 2 R 12 , S0 2 NR 13
  • Aromatic heterocycle is a 5 or 6 membered aromatic ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, optionally substituted by 1-3 groups selected from OR 13 , NR 13 R 14 , C0 2 R 13 , NR 13 C0 2 R 12 , R 12 , halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR 13 , S(0)R 12 , S0 2 R 12 , OC(0)R 13 , NR 13 S0 2 R 12 , S0 2 NR 13 R 14 , C(0)NR 13 R 14 .
  • Aromatic heterocycle is an unsubstituted 5 or 6 membered aromatic ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N.
  • Heterocycle is a 3 to 8 membered ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, optionally substituted by 1 to 3 groups selected from OR 13 , NR 13 R 14 , C0 2 R 13 , NR 13 C0 2 R 12 , R 12 , halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR 13 , S(O)R 12 , S0 2 R 12 , OC(0)R 13 , NR 13 S0 2 R 12 , SO 2 NR 13 R 14 , C(0)NR 13 R 14 .
  • Heterocycle is a 5 or 6 membered ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, optionally substituted by 1 to 3 groups selected from OR 13 , NR 13 R 14 , C0 2 R 13 , NR 13 C0 2 R 12 , R 12 , halo, CN, haloalkyl. O(haloalkyl), SR 13 , S(O)R 12 , S0 2 R 12 , OC(0)R 13 , NR 13 S0 2 R 12 , S0 2 NR 13 R 14 , C(0)NR 13 R 14 .
  • Heterocycle is an unsubstituted 5 or 6 membered ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, including oxiranyl, azetidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, thiolanyl, pyrrolidinyl, dioxolanyl, dihydropyranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, morpholinyl, piperidinyl and piperazinyl.
  • Preferred compounds of the present invention are:
  • (2S)-(-)-2-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-(1 -phenyl-1 -/-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid (Example 6); (2S)-2- ⁇ [(1 f?)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy ⁇ -3-[1 -(2-cyclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl]- propanoic acid (Example 15); (2S)-2- ⁇ [(1 f7)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy ⁇ -3-(1 -phenyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid (Example 17);
  • (2S)-2- ⁇ [(1 ?)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy ⁇ -3-[1 -(2-pyridinyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl]- propanoic acid (Example 52). Particularly preferred is (2 ⁇ -2- ⁇ [(1 f?)-2-amino-1-methylethyl]oxy ⁇ -3-(1 H-imidazol-4- yl)propanoic acid (Example 51).
  • the compounds of formula (I) are inhibitors of TAFIa. Inhibition of TAFIa can be demonstrated using an assay based on the method of Boffa et al. (J. Biol. Chem. 1998, 273, 2127) as further described below.
  • the activity of the compounds is characterized by a calculated Kj value.
  • the compounds of the present invention have a Ki value of 10 ⁇ M or less. Better compounds have a Kj value of 1 ⁇ M or less, or even 100nM or less. The most potent compounds have a Kj value of 25nM or less.
  • the compounds of formula (I) are selective for TAFIa over other carboxypeptidases, and particularly carboxypeptidase N (CPN). Unwanted inhibition of CPN is considered to be the most likely cause of undesirable side effects in clinical use. Selectivity can be expressed as the ratio of the Ki for TAFIa to the Kj for CPN.
  • the compounds of the present invention have a selectivity ratio of at least 5. Better compounds have a selectivity ratio of at least 10. The most selective compounds have a selectivity ratio of at least 50.
  • the compounds of formula (I) may be prepared according to the general methods which are described below and in the Examples and Preparations section. These methods provide a further aspect of the present invention. Nevertheless, the skilled man will appreciate that the compounds of the invention could be made by methods other than those herein described, by adaptation of the methods herein described and/or adaptation of a plethora of methods known in the art. It is to be understood that the synthetic transformation methods specifically mentioned herein may be carried out in various different sequences in order that the desired substances can be efficiently assembled. The skilled chemist will exercise his judgement and skill as to the most efficient sequence of reactions for the synthesis of a given target substance.
  • P 1 is preferably a lower alkyl group such as methyl or ethyl, in which case suitable conditions for this step include treatment with NaOH in dioxan for 1 -3 days.
  • Compounds of formula (II) may be prepared from the corresponding protected amines of formula (III) (wherein P 2 is a te/f-butyloxycarbonyl, benzyloxycarbonyl or fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl group, or any other amine protecting group). Where R 9 is H then the preparation involves only a deprotection step. Where R 9 is other than H then a further step is necessary to introduce R 9 , such as a reductive amination reaction.
  • Compounds of formula (III) may be prepared from imidazoleacetic acid derivatives of formula (V), wherein X is a leaving group such as a chlorine, bromine or iodine atom, or a methanesulphonate or trifluoromethanesulphonate group, by reaction with a alcohol of formula (VI).
  • X is a leaving group such as a chlorine, bromine or iodine atom, or a methanesulphonate or trifluoromethanesulphonate group
  • Compounds of formula (III) may alternatively be prepared from ⁇ -hydroxyimidazole- acetic acid derivatives of formula (VII) by reaction with a compound of formula (IX) wherein Y is a leaving group such as a chlorine, bromine or iodine atom, or a methanesulphonate or trifluoromethanesulphonate group.
  • Y is a leaving group such as a chlorine, bromine or iodine atom, or a methanesulphonate or trifluoromethanesulphonate group.
  • Compounds of formula (X) may be prepared from compounds of formula (XI) by dehydration.
  • the transformation may be accomplished using, for example, methanesulfonyl chloride and a tertiary amine.
  • Compounds of formula (XI) may be prepared by an aldol-type reaction between alkoxy-esters of formula (XII) and aldehydes or ketones of formula (XIII) in the presence of a strong base, such as lithium diisopropylamide.
  • Compounds of formula (XVI) may be prepared by reacting an aldehyde or ketone of formula (Xlll) with a lactam of formula (XVII) in the presence of a strong base, such as lithium diisopropylamide.
  • Compounds of formula (XVII) may be prepared from aminoalcohols of formula (XVIII) by reaction with chloroacetyl chloride.
  • Compounds of formula (XVIII) are generally known, or may be prepared by adaptation of generally known methods.
  • R 1 When R 1 is H it may be necessary or convenient to protect the imidazole as its trityl derivative. Accordingly, when R 1 is H, compounds of formula (XIX), (XX) or (XXI) may be elaborated by the foregoing methods to provide compounds of formula (XXII) which, upon deprotection, give compounds of formula (III).
  • R 1 is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group it may be introduced in an alkylation reaction.
  • Suitable conditions for this step include treatment with 1.1 eq of cesium carbonate and 1.1 eq of an alkylating agent in N ( N-dimethylformamide, or with sodium hydride and 1.1 eq of an alkylating agent in THF.
  • Suitable alkylating reagents include R 1 -CI, R 1 -Br, R 1 -l, R 1 -OS0 2 CH 3 and R 1 -OS0 2 CF 3 .
  • R 1 is Aryl or Aromatic heterocycle it may be introduced in an arylation reaction.
  • Suitable conditions for this step include treatment with 2eq of Aryl-B(OH) 2 or Aromatic heterocycle-B(OH) 2 in the presence of 1.5 eq of copper acetate, 2eq of pyridine, air and 4A molecular sieves.
  • the compounds of formula (I) are useful as therapeutic agents.
  • the compounds will generally be formulated so as to be amenable to administration to the subject by the chosen route.
  • the present invention provides for a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, diluent or carrier selected with regard to the intended route of administration and standard pharmaceutical practice.
  • the compounds of formula (I) can be administered orally, buccally or sublingually in the form of tablets, capsules, ovules, elixirs, solutions or suspensions.
  • These formulations may contain flavouring or colouring agents, and may be adapted for immediate-, delayed-, modified-, sustained-, pulsed- or controlled-release applications.
  • Tablets may contain excipients such as microcrystalline cellulose, lactose, sodium citrate, calcium carbonate, dibasic calcium phosphate and glycine, disintegrants such as starch (preferably corn, potato or tapioca starch), sodium starch glycollate, croscarmellose sodium and certain complex silicates, and granulation binders such as polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (HPMC), hydroxypropyl- cellulose (HPC), sucrose, gelatin and acacia. Additionally, lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid, glyceryl behenate and talc may be included.
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in gelatin capsules.
  • Preferred excipients in this regard include lactose, starch, cellulose and derivatives thereof, milk sugar and high molecular weight polyethylene glycols.
  • the compounds of formula (I) may be combined with various sweetening or flavouring agents, colouring matter or dyes, with emulsifying and/or suspending agents, and with diluents such as water, ethanol, propylene glycol and glycerin, and combinations thereof.
  • the compounds of formula (I) may also be administered in the form of a solution- or suspension-filled soft or hard gelatin capsule.
  • Such capsules are generally made of gelatin, glycerin, water and sorbitol.
  • Hard capsules are distinguished from soft capsules by containing less water and thus having a correspondingly stronger shell. Additional excipients suitable for use in such capsules include propylene glycol, ethanol, water, glycerol and edible oils.
  • the compounds of formula (I) can also be administered parenterally, for example, intravenously, intra-arterially, intraperitoneally, intrathecally, intraventricularly, intraurethrally, intrasternally, intracranially, intramuscularly or subcutaneously.
  • parenterally for example, intravenously, intra-arterially, intraperitoneally, intrathecally, intraventricularly, intraurethrally, intrasternally, intracranially, intramuscularly or subcutaneously.
  • Such administration may be as a single bolus injection or as a short- or long-duration infusion.
  • the compounds are preferably formulated as a sterile solution in water or another suitable solvent or mixture of solvents.
  • the solution may contain other substances such as: salts, particularly sodium chloride, and sugars, particularly glucose or mannitol, to make the solution isotonic with blood; buffering agents such as acetic, citric and phosphoric acids and their sodium salts, such that the pH of the solution is preferably between 3 and 9; and preservatives.
  • salts particularly sodium chloride
  • sugars particularly glucose or mannitol
  • buffering agents such as acetic, citric and phosphoric acids and their sodium salts, such that the pH of the solution is preferably between 3 and 9
  • preservatives such as acetic, citric and phosphoric acids and their sodium salts
  • the compounds of formula (I) can also be administered intranasally or by inhalation and are conveniently delivered in the form of a dry powder inhaler or an aerosol spray presentation from a pressurised container, pump, spray, atomiser or nebuliser, with or without the use of a suitable propellant such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, a hydrofluoroalkane such as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFA 134ATM) or 1 ,1 ,1 , 2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane (HFA 227EATM), carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, a hydrofluoroalkane such as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-
  • the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount.
  • the pressurised container, pump, spray, atomiser or nebuliser may contain a solution or suspension of the active compound, e.g. using a mixture of ethanol and the propellant as the solvent, which may additionally contain a lubricant, e.g. sorbitan trioleate.
  • Capsules and cartridges (made, for example, from gelatin) for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated to contain a powder mix of a compound of the formula (I) and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
  • the compounds of formula (I) can be administered by the vaginal or rectal routes in the form of a suppository or pessary, or The compounds of formula (I) may also be administered dermally or transdermally, for example, by the use of a skin patch.
  • the compounds of formula (I) can be applied topically in the form of a gel, hydrogel, lotion, solution, cream, ointment or dusting powder.
  • Suitable ointments may contain the active compound suspended or dissolved in, for example, a mixture with one or more of the following: mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white petrolatum, propylene glycol, polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene compound, emulsifying wax and water.
  • Suitable lotions or creams may contain the active compound suspended or dissolved in, for example, a mixture of one or more of the following: mineral oil, sorbitan monostearate, a polyethylene glycol, liquid paraffin, polysorbate 60, cetyl esters wax, cetearyl alcohol, 2-octyldodecanol, benzyl alcohol and water.
  • the compounds of formula (I) may be administered by the ocular route.
  • the compounds can be formulated as micronised suspensions in isotonic, pH adjusted, sterile saline, or, preferably, as solutions in isotonic, pH adjusted, sterile saline, optionally in combination with a preservative such as a benzylalkonium chloride.
  • they may be formulated in an ointment such as petrolatum.
  • the compounds of formula (I) may also be used in combination with a cydodextrin.
  • Cyclodextrins are known to form inclusion and non-inclusion complexes with drug molecules. Formation of a drug-cyclodextrin complex may modify the solubility, dissolution rate, bioavailability and/or stability property of a drug molecule. Drug- cyclodextrin complexes are generally useful for most dosage forms and administration routes.
  • the cydodextrin may be used as an auxiliary additive, e.g. as a carrier, diluent or solubiliser.
  • Alpha-, beta- and gamma-cyclodextrins are most commonly used and suitable examples are described in W091/11172, WO94/02518 and W098/55148.
  • the compounds of formula (I) are inhibitors of TAFIa they are useful as therapeutic agents in pathologies in which inhibition of TAFIa is beneficial.
  • the present invention provides for a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof for use as a medicament.
  • the present invention provides for the use of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of a condition selected from thrombotic conditions, atherosclerosis, adhesions, dermal scarring, cancer, fibrotic conditions, inflammatory diseases and those conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing bradykinin levels in the body.
  • TAFIa inhibitors for the treatment of thrombotic conditions derives from their potential to promote fibrinolysis while not interfering with coagulation. In most clinically relevant situations thrombus formation is sub-acute, i.e. the thrombus forms slowly.
  • TAFIa inhibitors accelerate the dissolution of the developing thrombus without interfering with the clotting response.
  • one preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of a compound of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of a thrombotic condition selected from myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, stroke, young stroke, cerebral infarction, cerebral thrombosis, cerebral embolism, peripheral vascular disease, angina and other forms of acute coronary syndromes, disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis, pulmonary embolism, embolic events secondary to cardiac arrhythmias and the prevention of cardiovascular events following surgical revascularisation or intervention, or for improving the outcome of organ transplantation by reducing blood clotting and so preserving organ function.
  • a thrombotic condition selected from myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, stroke, young stroke, cerebral infarction, cerebral thrombosis, cerebral embolism, peripheral vascular disease, angina and other forms of acute coronary syndromes, disseminated
  • Cardiovascular events following intervention surgery include conditions such as restenosis or reocdusion following interventions such as percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, grafting, stent in-placement, coronary bypass surgery or any other forms of surgical revascularisation or intervention.
  • Disseminated intravascular coagulation includes all conditions resulting from intravascular activation of the coagulation process. This might occur acutely through the release of procoagulant substances (eg. obstetric emergencies, snakebite, crush injury malignancy), by abnormal contact of the blood (eg. infections, burns, extracorporeal circulation, grafts) or though generation of procoagulants in the blood (transfusion reactions, leukemia); or chronically, (eg.
  • Deep vein thrombosis also encompasses what is known as 'economy class syndrome', where clots form in subjects forced to endure cramped conditions for a period of time, such as those sitting in the economy class seats of an aeroplane.
  • Non-ocdusive thrombi not only restrict blood flow leading to myocardial ischemia and angina pectoris but also, due to incomplete endogenous lysis, may be incorporated into the arterial wall as solidified plaque material enhancing the atherosclerotic process.
  • Long-term administration of a TAFIa inhibitor promotes the lysis of developing thrombi and therefore provides a safe and efficacious treatment which alleviates the symptoms of angina pectoris while impairing the progression of the underlying disease.
  • Conventional treatment of myocardial ischaemia in clinically stable coronary artery disease is predominately designed to reduce cardiac workload and enhance blood flow.
  • Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of atherosclerosis, including atherosclerosis as a consequence of peripheral vascular disease, insulin resistance and Syndrome X, and further including myocardial ischaemia and angina pectoris resulting from atherosclerosis.
  • Atherosclerosis is taken to include both primary and secondary coronary artery disease, in which atherosclerosis restricts the blood supply to the heart.
  • Primary prevention of coronary artery disease means preventing the onset of ischemic complications such as myocardial infarction in patients with no history of coronary artery disease but who have one or more risk factors.
  • Secondary prevention of coronary artery disease means preventing ischemic complications in patients with established coronary artery disease, such as patients who have had a previous myocardial infarction.
  • Syndrome X is a term often used to group together a number of interrelated diseases. The first stage of syndrome X consists of insulin resistance, abnormal cholesterol and triglyceride levels, obesity and hypertension. Any one of these conditions may be used to diagnose the start of Syndrome X.
  • the disease may then progress with one condition leading to the development of another in the group.
  • insulin resistance is associated with high lipid levels, hypertension and obesity.
  • the disease then cascades, with the development of each additional condition increasing the risk of developing more serious diseases. This can progress to the development of diabetes, kidney disease and heart disease. These diseases may lead to stroke, myocardial infarction and organ failure. Atherosclerosis is common in patients with Syndrome X.
  • TAFIa inhibitors are also effective in preventing the formation of adhesions in the body. Most surgical procedures and physical traumas result in bleeding into the cavities between tissues. The blood which collects at these sites then clots forming fibrin-rich thrombi. These thrombi bridge the gaps between adjacent tissues and act as foci for the accumulation of inflammatory cells and fibroblasts. Invading fibroblasts lay down a collagen-rich extracellular matrix which strengthens the adhesion of the tissues producing a firm bond which may then restrict movement. Adhesions have been characterised according to their location and may result following any surgery, e.g. abdominal, orthopaedic, neurological, cardiovascular and ocular surgery.
  • Treatment with a TAFIa inhibitor around and/or after surgical intervention may enhance fibrinolysis of the fibrin-rich thrombi and hence inhibit thrombus formation, accretion and stabilization, thereby inhibiting adhesion formation.
  • a TAFIa inhibitor given either locally as a topical application or systemically may be seen to be of benefit in a range of surgical procedures.
  • administration of a TAFIa inhibitor may be used to treat adhesions resulting from other forms of non-surgical physical trauma where this has caused internal bleeding. Examples of such trauma might include sporting injuries or anything else resulting in a tear, cut, bruise or induration of the body.
  • Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of adhesions or dermal scarring.
  • TAFIa inhibitors are also effective in inhibiting tumour maturation, progression and metastasis. Without being bound by any theory, it is believed that the hemostatic system is involved at several levels of cancer pathology, including neovascularisation, shedding of cells from the primary tumour, invasion of the blood supply, adherence to the vessel wall and growth at the metastatic site. It is thought that the efficacy of TAFIa inhibitors stems from an ability to reduce fibrin deposition around solid tumours and thereby inhibit the above processes. Accordingly, another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of cancer.
  • TAFIa inhibitors are efficacious in treatment of any condition in which fibrosis is a contributing factor.
  • Suitable fibrotic conditions include cystic fibrosis, pulmonary fibrotic diseases such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), fibromuscular dysplasia and fibrotic lung disease, and fibrin deposition in the eye during opthalmic surgery.
  • another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of fibrotic disease, and in particular for the treatment or prevention of a fibrotic condition selected from cystic fibrosis, pulmonary fibrotic diseases, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), fibromuscular dysplasia, fibrotic lung disease and fibrin deposition in the eye during opthalmic surgery.
  • a fibrotic condition selected from cystic fibrosis, pulmonary fibrotic diseases, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), fibromuscular dysplasia, fibrotic lung disease and fibrin deposition in the eye during opthalmic surgery.
  • TAFIa inhibitors are efficacious in the treatment of inflammation, inflammatory diseases such as asthma, arthritis, endometriosis, inflammatory bowel diseases, psoriasis and atopic dermatitis and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's disease and Parkinson's disease.
  • inflammatory diseases such as asthma, arthritis, endometriosis, inflammatory bowel diseases, psoriasis and atopic dermatitis and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's disease and Parkinson's disease.
  • another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of inflammation, inflammatory diseases such as asthma, arthritis, endometriosis, inflammatory bowel diseases, psoriasis and atopic dermatitis and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's disease and Parkinson's disease.
  • TAFIa binds to and breaks down bradykinin (Tan et al., Biochemistry 1995, 34, 5811).
  • bradykinin There are many conditions which are known to benefit from maintaining or enhancing levels of bradykinin such as hypertension, angina, heart failure, pulmonary hypertension, renal failure and organ failure.
  • another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing levels of bradykinin.
  • the present invention provides a method of treating or preventing thrombotic conditions, atherosclerosis, adhesions, dermal scarring, cancer, fibrotic conditions, inflammatory diseases and those conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing bradykinin levels in the body which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
  • One preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing thrombosis, particularly myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, stroke, young stroke, cerebral infarction, cerebral thrombosis, cerebral embolism, peripheral vascular disease, angina and other forms of acute coronary syndromes, disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis, pulmonary embolism, embolic events secondary to cardiac arrhythmias and preventing cardiovascular events following intervention surgery which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
  • thrombosis particularly myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, stroke, young stroke, cerebral infarction, cerebral thrombosis, cerebral embolism, peripheral vascular disease, angina and other forms of acute coronary syndromes, disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis
  • Subjects with thrombotic conditions who are suitable for treatment by the present invention include those having conditions associated with hypercoagulability, such as factor V mutation, antithrombin III deficiency, heparin cof actor II deficiency, protein C deficiency, protein S deficiency and polycythemia vera, and those exhibiting homocystinaemia or homocystinuria.
  • Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing atherosclerosis which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
  • Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing adhesions or dermal scarring which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
  • Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing cancer which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
  • Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing a fibrotic condition such as cystic fibrosis, pulmonary fibrotic diseases, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), fibromuscular dysplasia, fibrotic lung disease and fibrin deposition in the eye during ophthalmic surgery which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
  • a fibrotic condition such as cystic fibrosis, pulmonary fibrotic diseases, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), fibromuscular dysplasia, fibrotic lung disease and fibrin deposition in the eye during ophthalmic surgery which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt,
  • Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing an inflammatory disease such as asthma, arthritis, endometriosis, inflammatory bowel diseases, psoriasis or atopic dermatitis or a neurodegenerative disease such as Alzheimer's disease or Parkinson's disease which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
  • an inflammatory disease such as asthma, arthritis, endometriosis, inflammatory bowel diseases, psoriasis or atopic dermatitis or a neurodegenerative disease such as Alzheimer's disease or Parkinson's disease
  • Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing levels of bradykinin which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
  • the amount of compound administered and the frequency of administration will be determined by the attending physician taking into account the characteristics of the patient, such as age, weight and state of health, and the degree of inhibition of TAFIa desired.
  • the total daily dose for a typical 70kg adult will generally be between 1mg and 5g, preferably between 10mg and 1g, more preferably between 50mg and 750mg. The total dose may be given as a single or divided dose.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be used alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents.
  • the administration of the two agents may be simultaneous or sequential.
  • Simultaneous administration includes the administration of a single dosage form that comprises both agents and the administration of the two agents in separate dosage forms at substantially the same time.
  • Sequential administration includes the administration of the two agents according to different schedules provided that there is an overlap in the periods during which the treatment is provided.
  • Suitable agents with which the compounds of formula (I) can be co-administered include antithrombotics, including antiplatelet agents, anticoagulants and profibrinolytics.
  • Suitable antithrombotics include: aspirin, PlavixTM, ticlopidine, warfarin (CoumadinTM), unfractionated heparin, hirudin (LepirudinTM), streptokinase, urokinase, recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (tPA), dipyridamole, ReoproTM, AggrastatTM, and IntegrilinTM.
  • the compounds of formula (I) can also be administered together with antihypertensive agents and with agents to treat dyslipidaemia such as statins eg LipitorTM.
  • Further suitable drug classes for co-administration include Factor X inhibitors and antiarrhythmics such as amiodarone or digoxin.
  • the present invention provides for the use of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof in combination with an antithrombotic agent for the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of thrombosis.
  • an antithrombotic agent for the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of thrombosis.
  • the antithrombotic is an profibrinolytic.
  • the antithrombotic is recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (tPA).
  • the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing thrombosis, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof in combination with an antithrombotic to a patient in need of such treatment.
  • the antithrombotic is a profibrinolytic.
  • the antithrombotic is recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (tPA).
  • the present invention provides for a kit comprising: a) a composition comprising a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof as disclosed herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier; b) a composition comprising an antithrombotic and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier; and c) a container
  • the components of this kit may be administered separately, simultaneously or sequentially.
  • the present invention also provides for the use a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof as a coating on intravascular devices such as indwelling catheters for dialysis, replacement heart valves or arterial stents; and as a coating on extra- corporeal blood circulation devices such as heart, lung and kidney dialysis machines, to prevent thrombosis, particularly myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, stroke, young stroke, cerebral infarction, cerebral thrombosis, cerebral embolism, peripheral vascular disease, angina and other forms of acute coronary syndromes, disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis, pulmonary embolism, embolic events secondary to cardiac arrhythmias and the prevention of cardiovascular events such as restenosis following intervention surgery such as percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, grafting, stent in-placement, coronary bypass surgery or any other forms of surgical revascularisation or intervention
  • the invention provides for intravascular devices, of which the intravascular portion is coated with a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof; and extra corporeal blood circulation devices such as heart, lung and kidney dialysis machines, where the portion coming into contact with the subjects blood is coated with a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.
  • the compounds of the present invention are TAFIa inhibitors, whose utility is based upon preventing the reaction between a developing thrombus and TAFIa. It has been found that the compounds of the present invention are also capable of binding to the unactivated TAFI molecule, at the site implicated in the reaction between TAFIa and the developing clot.
  • TAFIa inhibitors as described above in terms of scope and utility, includes such TAFIa inhibitors which bind to TAFI.
  • Proton NMR spectra were measured on a Varian Inova 300, Varian Inova 400, or Varian Mercury 400 spectrometer in the solvents specified. In the NMR spectra, only non- exchangeable protons which appeared distinct from the solvent peaks are reported. Low resolution mass spectra were recorded on either a Fisons Trio 1000, using thermospray positive ionisation, or a Finnigan Navigator, using electrospray positive or negative ionisation. High resolution mass spectra were recorded on a Bruker Apex II FT-MS using electrospray positive ionisation. Combustion analyses were conducted by Schwarz Analytical UK. Ltd., Uxbridge, Middlesex.
  • Optical rotations were determined at 25°C using a Perkin Elmer 341 polarimeter using the solvents and concentrations specified.
  • Example compounds designated as (+) or (-) optical isomers are assigned based on the sign of optical rotation when determined in a suitable solvent.
  • HyfloTM Hyflo supercel® from Aldrich Chemical Company liq liquid
  • lmidazole-4-carboxaldehyde (30g, 0.31 mol) was added portionwise to a solution of sodium hydride (13.9g, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.348mol) in tetrahydrofuran (450ml), and the solution was stirred for 45 minutes.
  • n-Propyl bromide (31.2ml, 0.344mol) was then added portionwise, followed by 18-crown-6 (150mg), and the mixture was heated under reflux for 18 hours.
  • Aqueous ammonium chloride solution was added to the cooled solution, and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (2x) and dichloromethane (2x). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 ), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • lmidazole-4-carboxaldehyde (4.8g, 50mmol) was added portionwise to a suspension of sodium hydride (2.20g, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 55mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (150ml), and the mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 1 hour.
  • 2- Cydohexylethyl bromide (8.6ml, 55mmol) was added, and the mixture was heated under reflux for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between water (500ml) and dichloromethane (500ml). The layers were separated, and the organic phase was dried (MgS0 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure.
  • lmidazole-4-carboxaldehyde (673g, 70mmol) was added portionwise to a suspension of sodium hydride (1.68g, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 70mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (280ml), and the mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes.
  • (2-Bromoethyl)benzene (9.56ml, 70mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 hours.
  • the mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between water (300ml) and dichloromethane (500ml), and the layers were separated.
  • the organic phase was dried (MgS0 4 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure.
  • Acetic acid (ca. 150ml) was added to a solution of p-anisaldehyde (58.2g, 0.42mol) and ethanolamine (152ml, 2.52mol) in methanol (1 L), to achieve a pH of 6.
  • Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (100g, 0.47mol) was added portionwise, and once addition was complete, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 hours. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, basified using 1 N sodium hydroxide solution and extracted with dichloromethane (10x300ml).
  • the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between dichloromethane (150ml) and sodium hydroxide solution (150ml, 0.5N). The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was saturated with sodium chloride, then extracted with further dichloromethane (3x30ml). The combined organic solutions were dried (MgS0 4 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel (gradient elution 98:2:0.2 to 97:3:0.3 dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 NH 3 ) to afford an orange oil (4.9g).
  • N,N-Dimethylethanolamine (5.02ml, 50mmol) was added dropwise over 5 minutes to an ice-cooled suspension of sodium hydride (2.2g, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, ⁇ mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100ml), and the solution was stirred for 30 minutes.
  • tert-Butyl bromoacetate (7.38ml, ⁇ Ommol) was added dropwise over ⁇ minutes, then the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for a further 18 hours.
  • Sodium hydride (704mg, 60% in mineral oil, 17.6mmol) was added to an ice-cooled solution of tert-butyl (3r7)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (J. Med. Chem. 1998, 41(25), 4983) ( ⁇ g, 267mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100ml), and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 20 minutes.
  • tert-Butyl bromoacetate ( ⁇ .2g, 267mmol) was added and the mixture was heated under reflux for 18 hours, then cooled and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and water and the phases separated.
  • Trimethylsilyl chloride (1.3ml, 10.2mmol), copper (I) chloride (30mg, 0.3mmol) and cyclohexylmagnesium chloride (4.6ml, 2N in diethyl ether, 9.2mmol) were added slowly to an ice-cooled solution of ethyl 3,3-dimethylacrylate (1g, ⁇ . ⁇ mmol) in 0 tetrahydrofuran (10ml). The solution was stirred for 10 minutes, then allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for an hour. Saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution (10ml) was added and the mixture was partitioned between water (10ml) and diethyl ether (20ml).
  • Lithium borohydride (1.23g, ⁇ 6.6mmol) was added to a solution of the ester of Preparation 19 (4g, 18.9mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (30ml), and the mixture was stirred 6 at 60°C for 18 hours.
  • Aqueous ammonium chloride solution (15ml) was added carefully to the cooled solution, and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3x30ml). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (MgS0 4 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure.
  • the crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate:pentane (20:80) as eluant to afford the title compound, 1g.
  • Triphenylphosphine (1.8g, 7.1 mmol) was added portionwise to an ice-cooled solution of the alcohol of Preparation 20 (1g, 5.9mmol) and carbon tetrabromide (2.9g, 8.8mmol) in dichloromethane (15ml), and once addition was complete, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 hours. The solution was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was suspended in a mixture of pentane:ethyl acetate ( ⁇ :1 , by volume). The resulting precipitate was filtered off through a pad of silica gel and washed with pentane:ethyl acetate ( ⁇ :1 , by volume, 300ml).
  • Lithium diisopropylamide (17.4ml, 2M in heptane/tetrahydrofuran/ethylbenzene, 34.8mmol) was added over 10 minutes to a cooled (-78°C) solution of the compound of Preparation 10 (3.42g, 29mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100ml), and the resulting solution was stirred for 20 minutes.
  • the aldehyde of Preparation 1 (4.81 g, 34.8mmol) was added and the mixture was allowed to warm slowly to room temperature, then stirred for 18 hours.
  • Aqueous ammonium chloride solution (20ml) was added, and the mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure.
  • Lithium diisopropylamide (4.3ml, 2M in heptane/tetrahydrofuran/ethylbenzene, 8.6mmol) was added dropwise over 5 minutes to a solution of the amine of Preparation 17 (1.46g, 7.2mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (20ml) and the solution was stirred at -78°C for 20 minutes.
  • the aldehyde of Preparation 1 (1.18g, 8.6mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for 3 hours then allowed to warm to -20°C. Water was added, and the mixture pre-adsorbed onto silica gel.
  • Triethylamine (9.19ml, 65.9mmol) was added to a solution of the alcohol of Preparation 23 (15.8g, 44.0mmol) in dichloromethane (300ml). The solution was cooled in ice, methanesulphonyl chloride (5.1ml, 65.9mmol) was added, and the solution was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. Additional triethylamine (3.06ml, 22mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours then cooled. The mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (1000ml) and washed with sodium bicarbonate solution (200ml).
  • Methanesulphonyl chloride (911 ⁇ l, 1178mmol) was added dropwise to an ice-cooled solution of the alcohol of Preparation 30 (4.5g, 7.85mmol) in dichloromethane (40ml) and triethylamine (1.64ml, 1178mmol), and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Additional triethylamine (546 ⁇ l, 3.93mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane (50ml) and water (50ml) and the layers were separated. The organic phase was dried (MgS0 4 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Triethylamine (178ml, 12.8mmol) was added to a solution of the alcohol of
  • Triethylamine (0.98ml, 7.03mmol) was added to a solution of the alcohol of Preparation 27 (1.41 g, 3.35mmol) in dichloromethane (15ml). The solution was cooled in ice, methanesulphonyl chloride (311 ⁇ l, 4.02mmol) was added, and the mixture was warmed to 40°C and stirred for 18 hours, then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of pentane:ethyl acetate: methanol (75:25:0 to 0:100:0 to 0:95:5) to afford the title compound as an orange oil, 449mg.
  • Methanesulphonyl chloride (340 ⁇ l, 4.4mmol) was added dropwise to an ice-cooled solution of the alcohol of Preparation 33 (1.36g, 4.0mmol) and triethylamine (616 ⁇ l, 4.4mmol) in dichloromethane (20ml). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, additional triethylamine (616 ⁇ l, 4.4mmol) was added, and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so the solution was heated to reflux and stirred for a further 3 hours.
  • Triethylamine (3.32ml, 23.8mmol) was added to a solution of the alcohol of
  • Preparation 24 (5.47g, 21.6mmol) in dichloromethane (80ml), and the solution was cooled in ice.
  • a solution of methanesulphonyl chloride (1.84ml, 23.8mmol) in dichloromethane (3ml) was added over 5 minutes, and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour.
  • the mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure, the residue was dissolved in N,N-dimethylformamide (15ml), triethylamine (3.32ml, 23.8mmol) was added, and the solution was heated at reflux and stirred for 20 minutes.
  • the crude product was purified twice by column chromatography on silica gel using first an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0 to 95:5:0.5), then using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:diethylamine (100:0 to 95:5), to afford the title compound, as a colourless gum, 191 mg.
  • the product was further purified by column chromatography using a Biotage ® silica gel column, and an elution gradient of toluene:diethylamine (100:0 to 88:12) to afford the title compound as a pale yellow gum, 120mg.
  • Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (4.55g, 8.30mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 47 (1.43g, 4.15mmol) in acetonitrile (9ml) and water (9ml) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in methanol.
  • This solution was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (95:5:0.5 to 90:10:1) to afford an orange oil.
  • Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (57g, 10.4mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 48 (1.87g, 5.2mmol) in acetonitrile (50ml) and water (50ml), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours.
  • the solvents were evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified using a Dowex ® 50WX8-200 ion-exchange column and 5% 0.88 ammonia as eluant. This product was further purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0 to 90:10:1) to afford the title compound, 300mg.
  • Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.1g, 2.0mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 49 (411 mg, 1.Ommol) in acetonitrile (5ml) and water (5ml), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was pre-adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0:0 to 75:0:25:0 to 0:90:10:1).
  • Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (387mg, 0758mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 61 (120mg, 0.283mmol) in acetonitrile (8ml) and water (5ml) and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was pre-adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound as a colourless oil, 66mg.
  • Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (883mg, 1.6mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 50 (326mg, 0.81 mmol) in acetonitrile (2.4ml) and water (2.4ml) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 days, then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in methanol and adsorbed onto silica gel, then purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0 to 90:10:1) to afford the title compound as an orange oil, 97mg.
  • Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.43g, 2.61 mmol) was added to a solution of the protected morpholinone of Preparation 74 (330mg, 0.87mmol) in water (2ml) and acetonitrile (2ml), and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 4 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.43g, 2.61 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for a further 2 hours. The mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane (200ml) and a solution of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (1g) in saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (50ml).
  • Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (297mg, 0.55mmol) was added to a solution of the protected morpholinone of Preparation 75 (94mg, 0.22mmol) in water (2ml) and acetonitrile (2ml), and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 15 hours.
  • Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (0.5g) in saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5ml) was added and the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (2x50ml). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 4 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure.
  • the crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (98:1 :1 to 94:3:3), to afford the title compound as an oil, 22mg.
  • Aryl boronic acids (R-B(OH) 2 ), (0.74mmol) were added to solutions of the bromo compound of Preparation 98 (180mg, 0.49mmol) tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)- palladium(O) (56mg, 0.051 mmol) and sodium carbonate solution (295 ⁇ l, 2M,
  • the crude product was pre-adsorbed onto silica gel and purified twice by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1:0.1 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound, 370mg.
  • Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (482mg, 0.88mmol) and water (1 ml) were added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 60 (181mg, 0.44mmol) in acetonitrile (1 ml) and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate was added (250mg, 0.46mmol) and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for a further 5 hours.
  • the mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane (75ml) and a solution of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (1g) in aqueous sodium bicarbonate (30ml), and the phases were separated.
  • the crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane: methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 98:2:0.2) to afford the title compound as a white foam, 100mg.
  • the residual yellow oil was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 98:2:0.2) to afford the title compound as a white foam, 77mg.
  • Triethylamine (3ml, 2175mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of the alcohol of Preparation 153 (5.41 g, 14.50mmol) in dichloromethane (60ml), and the solution was cooled to 0°C.
  • Methanesulphonyl chloride (1.68ml, 2175mmol) was added, and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature, then stirred for a further 2 hours.
  • Additional triethylamine (2ml, 14.50mmol) was added, and the mixture was warmed to 35°C, then stirred for 18 hours.
  • Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.1g, 2mmol) was added to a solution of the protected lactam of Preparation 55b (200mg, 0.63mmol) in water (4ml) and acetonitrile (4ml) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours.
  • the solution was diluted with acetonitrile (5ml) and 0.88 ammonia (4ml), and the mixture was filtered through Arbocel ® , washing through with a solution of acetonitrile:water (50:50, 10ml). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and the aqueous residue was washed with ether, then evaporated under reduced pressure.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be tested using the following assay, which is based on that disclosed in Boffa et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1998, 273, 2127.
  • the compounds are incubated with activated TAFI and a standard substrate for TAFIa, the rate of hydrolysis of the substrate is determined and compared to the rate of hydrolysis in the absence of the compounds, and the amount of inhibition expressed in terms of Kj.
  • Human TAFI (recombinant or purified) was activated by incubating 20 ⁇ l of stock solution (360 ⁇ g/ml) with 10 ⁇ l of human thrombin (10NIH units/ml), 10 ⁇ l of rabbit thrombomodulin (30 ⁇ g/ml), 6 ⁇ l calcium chloride (50mM) in 50 ⁇ l of 20mM HEPES (N- [2-hydroxyethyl]piperazine-N-[2-ethanesulfonic acid]) buffer containing 150mM sodium chloride and 0.01% TWEEN 80 (polyoxyethylene-sorbitan monooleate) pH 7.6 for 20 minutes at 22 ° C.
  • HEPES N- [2-hydroxyethyl]piperazine-N-[2-ethanesulfonic acid]
  • thrombin was neutralised by the addition of 10 ⁇ L of PPACK (D-Phe-Pro-Arg chloromethyl ketone) (1 OOnM).
  • PPACK D-Phe-Pro-Arg chloromethyl ketone
  • test compound in water A number of different dilutions of the test compound in water were made up. To 20 ⁇ l of each dilution was added 150 ⁇ l of HEPES buffer and 10 ⁇ l of TAFIa, which was then pre-incubated for 15 minutes at 24 e C. To each dilution was then added 20 ⁇ l furylacryloyl-alanyl-lysine (FAAL) at a standard concentration. Substrate turnover was measured by reading the absorbance of the reaction mixture at 330nm every 15 seconds for 30 minutes. The reaction was performed at 24 S C and samples were mixed for 3 seconds prior to each absorbance reading.
  • FFAAL furylacryloyl-alanyl-lysine
  • the selectivity of the compounds of the present invention for TAFIa over CPN was determined by calculating the Kj of the compounds of the present invention for CPN, then comparing it to the Kj for TAFIa.
  • the Kj was calculated using the assay for the calculation of TAFIa Kj, but substituting 10 ⁇ l of human CPN for 10 ⁇ l of TAFIa.
  • Those compounds of the present invention tested exhibited a strong selectivity for TAFIa over CPN of the order of >50:1.
  • the specific Kj values and calculated selectivities of certain compounds are detailed below:

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Compounds according to formula (I) wherein n is 0-3, R1 is optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, or C2-6 alkynyl, Heterocycle, Aromatic heterocycle, Aryl or hydrogen and R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8 and R9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or R5 and R8 are an alkylene chain, are novel. They are useful in the treatment of thrombotic conditions and other pathologies associated with fibrin deposition.

Description

- ( IMIDAZOLYL) -2-ALKOXYPROPANOIC ACIDS AS TAFIA INHIBITORS
The present invention relates to a series of novel 3-(imidazolyl)-2-(ω-aminoalkyloxy)- propanoic acid derivatives that are inhibitors of TAFIa inhibitors and are useful in the treatment of disease.
Background
Sophisticated mechanisms have evolved in mammals to repair the body in the event of vascular injury and so maintain hemostasis. The injured blood vessel constricts to reduce the blood flow to the area, platelets aggregate to reduce the loss of blood from the area, and fibrinogen is cleaved to produce fibrin which then polymerises and forms a clot. This clot covers the area of vascular damage, preventing blood loss. Polymerised fibrin also provides a provisional matrix which enhances the subsequent repair process. Once the blood vessel has been repaired the clot dissolves. The process leading to the formation of the clot is the coagulation cascade, and the process leading to its dissolution is the fibrinolysis cascade. Imbalances in the blood coagulation process are thought to be at the origin of a large and disparate number of disease conditions, which are linked by an unwanted build up of fibrin. The scale of fibrin build up is determined by the delicate equilibrium between the two biochemical cascades in the human body. Agents that can modulate the balance between coagulation and fibrinolysis are therefore potentially valuable in the treatment of these disease conditions.
Studies have shown that coagulation and fibrinolysis are linked through the generation of α-thrombin. α-Thrombin is the final product of the blood coagulation cascade and is responsible for the conversion of fibrinogen into fibrin. In addition to mediating coagulation, α-thrombin also reduces the rate at which blood clots are broken down by the serine protease plasmin. The protein that mediates this antifibrinolytic effect of α-thrombin is TAFI (Thrombin Activatable Fibrinolysis Inhibitor).
TAFI is a 60kDa glycoprotein found in human plasma. It is also known as procarboxypeptidase B, carboxypeptidase B, plasma carboxypeptidase B, carboxypeptidase U and carboxypeptidase R. Following initiation of the coagulation cascade it is transformed into an activated form, TAFIa, whereupon it acts upon the fibrin matrix of the developing blood clot to prevent its dissolution. TAFI circulates in normal plasma at a concentration of about 75nM in an inactive form. Thrombin converts the inactive zymogen to the active TAFI (TAFIa), a reaction that is augmented about 1250-fold by thrombomodulin. Once activated, TAFIa cleaves both C-terminal arginine and lysine residues from the developing fibrin clot. The removal of these dibasic amino acids from the surface of the fibrin matrix attenuates clot lysis by inhibiting the binding of the key mediators of fibrinolysis: tissue plasminogen activator (tPA) and its substrate, plasminogen, which is the precursor of plasmin. Both tPA and plasminogen contain a structural motif called a kringle domain which binds tightly to C-terminal lysine residues. The removal of these binding sites prevents the formation of a ternary complex between tPA, plasminogen and fibrin and this inhibits the conversion of plasminogen to plasmin, thus protecting the clot from rapid degradation.
In the presence of a TAFIa inhibitor, TAFIa will not be able to act upon a developing fibrin clot as described above to inhibit fibrinolysis of the clot. Thus a TAFIa inhibitor should serve to enhance fibrinolysis.
It can be seen that, in pathologies where the normal equilibrium between coagulation and fibrinolysis is disturbed in favour of coagulation, there will be a larger amount of fibrin present than normal. This makes it more likely that the subjects will develop one or more of the conditions in which thrombus build up is implicated. Such subjects can be expected to benefit from treatment with a pro-fibrinolytic agent. McKay etal. (Biochemistry\978, 17, 401) disclose the testing of a number of compounds as competitive inhibitors of bovine carboxypeptidase B of pancreatic origin. Inhibition was measured by the inhibitor's efficiency in protecting the active centre tyrosine and glutamic acid of bovine carboxypeptidase B from irreversible alkylation by bromoacetyl-D-arginine or bromoacetamidobutylguanidine. It is suggested that such inhibitors could act as bradykinin potentiators. Bovine enzymes of pancreatic origin are very different to those found in human plasma, so one would not expect inhibitors of one to inhibit the other. Moreover, such inhibitors are directed towards a very different utility. Accordingly this disclosure provides no teaching of TAFIa inhibitors or their utility.
Redlitz et al. (J. Clin. Invest. 1995, 96, 2534) teach the involvement of plasma carboxypeptidase B (pCPB, or TAFI) in the formation of clots. The lysis of blood clots was followed in the absence and presence of pCPB, whereupon it was found that the presence of pCPB slowed clot lysis. To confirm that pCPB was responsible two control reactions were run; one where the lysis experiment was repeated in the presence of pCPB and potato carboxypeptidase inhibitor, PCI, and a second where the lysis reaction was conducted in the presence of plasma from which pCPB was removed. In both cases lysis proceeded uninhibited.
Boffa etal. (J. Biol. Chem. 1998, 273, 2127) compare plasma and recombinant TAFI and TAFIa with respect to glycosylation, activation, thermal stability and enzymatic properties. Inhibition constants for three competitive inhibitors were determined: ε-aminocaproic acid (ε-ACA), 2-guanidinoethylmercaptosuccinic acid (GEMSA) and potato carboxypeptidase inhibitor (PCI).
There are large numbers of carboxypeptidases (i.e. enzymes that cleave the C-terminal amino acid from a peptide). They may be classified as acidic, neutral or basic, depending on the type of amino acid they cleave. Basic carboxypeptidases cleave arginine, lysine and histidine. TAFIa is a member of a specific subset of the basic carboxypeptidases. In terms of the present invention, the inhibitors disclosed above by Redlitz et al. and Boffa et al. are too weak, non-specific or otherwise unsuitable to be considered as suitable TAFIa inhibitors for therapeutic application. Further, whilst the role of TAFIa in clot lysis is explained, there is no suggestion that TAFIa inhibitors can be used to treat disease.
US-A-5993815 teaches the use of a peptide that binds to the TAFI zymogen, thereby inhibiting its activation, to treat those disorders where a C-terminal lysine or arginine is cleaved from an intact peptide. Suitable disorders are arthritis, sepsis, thrombosis, strokes, deep vein thrombosis and myocardial infarctions. The peptide used is an antibody or a functionally active fragment. The peptide should be used in an amount to promote fibrinolysis in vivo. WOOO/66550 and WO00/66557 disclose broad classes of compounds useful as inhibitors of carboxypeptidase U. Inhibitors of carboxypeptidase U are postulated to facilitate fibrinolysis and thus the compounds are taught as useful in the treatment of thrombotic conditions. There is no data to support this assertion, though details of a suitable assay are given.
WOOO/66152 discloses formulations containing a carboxypeptidase U inhibitor and a thrombin inhibitor. Suitable carboxypeptidase U inhibitors are those of WOOO/66550. The formulations are taught as primarily useful in treating thrombotic conditions.
WO01/19836 discloses a series of phosphonate esters and analogues thereof as carboxypeptidase B inhibitors that are suitable for the treatment or prevention of thrombotic diseases.
WO02/14285 discloses a series of α-imidazolylmethyl-ω-aminocarboxylic acids and
Figure imgf000005_0001
derivatives that are inhibitors of TAFIa. The compounds are considered to be potentially useful in the treatment of a number of conditions.
The present invention discloses a further class of TAFIa inhibitors.
Description of the Invention
In a first aspect, the present invention provides compounds according to general formula (I)
Figure imgf000005_0002
(I) wherein: n is O, 1 , 2 or 3; R1 is selected from (a) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain d-β alkyl group, (b) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain C2-6 alkenyl group,
(c) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain C2-6 alkynyl group,
(d) Aryl,
(e) Aromatic heterocycle,
(f) Heterocycle, and (g) hydrogen; where the optional substituents in groups (a), (b) and (c) above are selected from: C3-7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, Heterocycle, OR10, NR10R11, S(0)pR1°, OC(0)R1\ C02R10, CONR10R11, SO2NR10R11, halo and NHSO2R10, and where p is 0, 1 or 2; R2, R3, R4, R6, R7 and R9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl optionally substituted by OR10 or halo; R5 and R8 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl optionally substituted by OR10 or halo, or together are a C2- 6 alkylene chain; R10 and R11 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl;
Aryl is a 6-14 membered aromatic monocyclic or fused polycyclic carbocyclic group optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from R12, halo, OR13, NR13R14, NR13C02R12, CO2R13, NR13S02R12, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, S02NR13R14, C(0)NR13R14, C3-7 cycloakyl, 0(C3- cycloalkyl), R15 and OR15, where R12 is straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl, R13 and R14 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl, and R15 is phenyl optionally substituted by R12, OR13, halo or haloalkyl; Aromatic heterocycle is a 5 to 7 membered aromatic ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R12, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, SO2R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14 and C(0)NR13R14; and Heterocycle is a 3 to 8 membered ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, said ring further being optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R14, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14 and C(0)NR13R14, or a tautomer thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound or said tautomer.
As used herein: i) Halo includes fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo groups. ii) Haloalkyl includes monohaloalkyl, polyhaloalkyl and perhaloalkyl, such as 2-bromoethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, chlorodifluoromethyl and trichloromethyl. iii) Unless otherwise indicated, alkyl includes straight chain and branched chain alkyl.
It will be understood that, in the compounds according to general formula (I), the R1 group and C(R2)(R3)(amino acid) group may be attached at any atom of the imidazole ring that is available to form a covalent bond, and that it is not intended that the general formula should be interpreted as limiting the R1 group to the C2- and /^-positions, nor the C(R2)(R3)(amino acid) group to the C4- and C^-positions. It will further be understood that the two groups cannot both be attached to the same atom of the imidazole ring, and that only one of the nitrogen atoms (by convention designated N1) of the imidazole ring is available to form a covalent bond. Thus the possible substitution patterns are 1 ,2-; 1 ,4-; 1 ,5-; 2,4- and 2,5-. When the imidazole is 2,4- or 2,5-substituted then there is a hydrogen atom attached at the Λ/'-position.
Certain compounds according to formula (I) may exist in more than one tautomeric form. If the imidazole of general formula (I) is substituted at the 2- and 4-positions the 2,4-disubstituted imidazole can tautomerise to form the corresponding 2,5- disubstituted imidazole. Furthermore, where a compound includes an Aromatic heterocyle that is substituted with a hydroxyl group it may exist as the 'keto' tautomer. The tautomeric relationship between 2-hydroxypyridine and 2-pyridone is a well known example of this phenomenon. All such tautomers of compounds of formula (I), including mixtures thereof, are included in the scope of the present invention.
The compounds of formula (I) contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms (chiral centers) and can therefore exist in two or more optical stereoisomeric forms such as enantiomers, diastereomers and epimers. Where the compounds of formula (I) contain a carbon-carbon double bond, cis (Z) / trans (E) stereoisomerism may also occur. All such individual stereoisomers of the compounds of formula (I) and mixtures thereof, including racemates, are included in the scope of the present invention.
Individual stereoisomers may be separated from mixtures by conventional techniques such as, for example, by fractional crystallization or by chromatography of the mixture of compounds or of a suitable salt or derivative thereof. In particular, individual enantiomers of the compounds of formula (I) may be prepared by resolution, such as by H.P.L.C. of the corresponding racemate using a suitable chiral support or by fractional crystallisation of the diastereoisomeric salts formed by reaction of the corresponding racemate with a suitable optically active acid or base, as appropriate. The individual enantiomers may also be obtained from a corresponding optically pure intermediate prepared by such a resolution method. These general principles are discussed in more detail by J. Jacques and A. Collet ("Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions", Wiley, NY, 1981) and by W. Liu ("Handbook of Chiral Chemicals", D. Ager (ed.), M. Dekker, NY, 1999; chapter 8).
It will be appreciated that the compounds of formula (I) have both acidic and basic functional groups. Therefore, in addition to the uncharged form depicted in the general formula, they may exist as internal salts (zwitterions). Furthermore, they may form pharmaceutically acceptable salts with acids and bases. Such zwitterions and salts are included within the scope of the invention.
A pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of the formula (I) may be readily prepared by mixing together solutions of a compound of the formula (I) and the desired acid or base, as appropriate. The salt may precipitate from solution and be collected by filtration or may be recovered by evaporation of the solvent. Salts may also be prepared by ion exchange, such as by equilibrating a solution of a compound of formula (I) with an appropriate ion exchange resin. Ion exchange may also be used to convert one salt form of a compound of formula (I), such as a salt with an acid or base that is not pharmaceutically acceptable, to another salt form. These methods are generally well known in the art. Suitable acid addition salts are formed from acids which form non-toxic salts and examples are the hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, sulfate, bisulfate, nitrate, phosphate, hydrogen phosphate, acetate, maleate, fumarate, lactate, tartrate, citrate, gluconate, succinate, saccharate, benzoate, methanesulphonate, ethanesulphonate, benzenesulphonate, p-toluenesulphonate and pamoate salts. Suitable base salts are formed from bases which form non-toxic salts and examples are the sodium, potassium, aluminium, calcium, magnesium, zinc and diethanolamine salts. For a review of pharmaceutically acceptable salts see Berge et al. (J. Pharm. Sci., 1977, 66, 1).
The compounds of formula (I) may form pharmaceutically acceptable solvates (including hydrates). These solvates are also included in the scope of the present invention.
The compounds of formula (I) may exist in one or more crystalline forms. These polymorphs, including mixtures thereof are also included within the scope of the present invention.
The scope of the present invention further includes prodrugs of compounds of formula (I), i.e. pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives of the compounds in which one or more of the functional groups explicitly recited above have been modified such that they are converted to the parent compounds in vivo. Suitable prodrugs are discussed in Drugs of Today 1983, 19, 499-538 and Annual Reports in Medicinal Chemistry 1975, 70, 306-326.
The absolute stereochemistry of the compounds of formula (I) may be as depicted in formula (IA) or formula (IB) below. By convention the absolute stereochemistry at the chiral center of (IA) is designated as 'S and that of (IB) is 'R. The compounds of formula (IA) are particularly preferred.
Figure imgf000010_0001
(IA) (IB)
Preferred compounds of formula (I) include those where the imidazole is substituted at the C2 or C4 positions by the C(R )(R3)(amino acid) group to give compounds of formulae (IC) and (ID) respectively. Particularly preferred are those compounds of formula (I) where R1 is attached at the C4 position of the imidazole moiety and the C(R2)(R3)(amino acid) group is attached at the C2 position so as to give the 2,4-disubstituted imidazole of formula (IC1) or where R1 is attached at the N1 position of the imidazole moiety and the C(R2)(R3)(amino acid) group is attached at the C4 position so as to give the 1 ,4-disubstituted imidazole of formula (ID1). Most preferred are those compounds of formula (I) where R1 is attached at the N1 position of the imidazole moiety and the C(R2)(R3)(amino acid) group is attached at the C4 position so as to give the 1 ,4-disubstituted imidazole of formula (ID1).
Figure imgf000010_0002
(IC) (ID)
Figure imgf000011_0001
(IC1) (ID1)
Preferably n is 0 or 1. More preferably n is 0.
Preferably R1 is hydrogen, Aryl, or a C1-6 alkyl or C2-β alkenyl group optionally substituted by one or more groups selected from C3.7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, Heterocycle, OR10, NR10R11, S(0)pR1°, OC(0)R1\ C02R1°, CONR10R11, SO2NR10R11, halo and NHS02R1°. More preferably R1 is hydrogen, Aryl, C2-6 alkenyl or a Ci-6 alkyl group optionally substituted by one or more groups selected from C3.7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, OR10, C02R10, halo and NHS02R10. Yet more preferably R1 is hydrogen, Aryl or a Ci-6 alkyl group optionally substituted by a group selected from C3.7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, OR10, C02R1° and NHS02R10. Yet more preferably R1 is hydrogen, Aryl or a Ci-β alkyl group optionally substituted by a group selected from cydohexyl and Aryl. Yet more preferably R1 is hydrogen or Cι-3 alkyl. Most preferably R1 is hydrogen.
Preferably R2 and R3 are each independently selected from hydrogen and Cι-6 alkyl. More preferably R2 and R3 are hydrogen.
Preferably R4 is hydrogen or Cι-6 alkyl. More preferably R4 is hydrogen.
Preferably R6, R7and R9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and Ci-6 alkyl. More preferably R6, R7 and R9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and C1-3 alkyl. Yet more preferably R6, R7and R9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and methyl. Most preferably R6, R7 and R9 are all hydrogen. When R5 and R8 do not constitute a C2-6 alkylene link then R5 is preferably hydrogen or C-i-6 alkyl, more preferably hydrogen or Cι-3 alkyl, yet more preferably hydrogen or methyl, and most preferably methyl, and R8 is preferably hydrogen or Cι-6 alkyl, more preferably hydrogen or C-ι-3 alkyl, yet more preferably hydrogen or methyl, and most preferably hydrogen.
When R5 and R8 constitute a C2-6 alkylene link then the link is preferably a C2-3 alkylene link and more preferably it is a C2 alkylene link.
Preferably R10 and R11 are each independently selected from hydrogen and C1.3 aallkkyyll.. MMoonre preferably R10 and R11 are each independently selected from hydrogen and methyl
Aryl includes optionally substituted phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl and phenanthrenyl. Preferably Aryl is phenyl or naphthyl optionally substituted by 1 -3 groups selected from R12, halo, OR13, NR13R14, NR13C02R12, C02R13, NR13S02R12, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, S02NR13R14, C(0)NR13R14, C3-7 cycloakyl, O(C3-7 cycloalkyl), R15 and OR15. More preferably Aryl is phenyl optionally substituted by Cι-6 alkyl, halo, 0(Cι-6 alkyl), CF3, C3-7 cycloakyl, 0(C3-7 cycloalkyl), R15 or OR15 and R15 is phenyl optionally substituted by C1-6 alkyl, halo, 0(d.6 alkyl) or CF3. Yet more preferably Aryl is phenyl optionally substituted by Ci-β alkyl, CF3, cydohexyl, O(cyclohexyl), R15 or OR15 and R15 is phenyl optionally substituted by Cι-6 alkyl, Cl, F, 0(Cι-6 alkyl) or CF3. Most preferably Aryl is phenyl.
Preferably Aromatic heterocycle is a 5 or 6 membered aromatic ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms each independently selected from O, S and N, including optionally substituted furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, triazolyl, pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and triazinyl, optionally substituted by 1-3 groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R12, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(O)R12, S02R12, OC(O)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13Ru, C(0)NR13R14. More preferably Aromatic heterocycle is a 5 or 6 membered aromatic ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, optionally substituted by 1-3 groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R12, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14, C(0)NR13R14. Most preferably Aromatic heterocycle is an unsubstituted 5 or 6 membered aromatic ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N.
Preferably, Heterocycle is a 3 to 8 membered ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, optionally substituted by 1 to 3 groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R12, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(O)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, SO2NR13R14, C(0)NR13R14. More preferably, Heterocycle is a 5 or 6 membered ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, optionally substituted by 1 to 3 groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R12, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl. O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(O)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14, C(0)NR13R14. Most preferably, Heterocycle is an unsubstituted 5 or 6 membered ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, including oxiranyl, azetidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, thiolanyl, pyrrolidinyl, dioxolanyl, dihydropyranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, morpholinyl, piperidinyl and piperazinyl.
Preferred compounds of the present invention are:
(2S)-(-)-2-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-(1 -phenyl-1 -/-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid (Example 6); (2S)-2-{[(1 f?)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy}-3-[1 -(2-cyclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl]- propanoic acid (Example 15); (2S)-2-{[(1 f7)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy}-3-(1 -phenyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid (Example 17);
(2^-2-{[(2S)-2-aminopropyl]oxy}-3-[1-(2-cyclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl]propanoic acid (Example 34); (2S)-2-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-(1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid (Example 50); (2S)-2-{[(1 f7)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy}-3-(1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid (Example 51); and
(2S)-2-{[(1 ?)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy}-3-[1 -(2-pyridinyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl]- propanoic acid (Example 52). Particularly preferred is (2^-2-{[(1 f?)-2-amino-1-methylethyl]oxy}-3-(1 H-imidazol-4- yl)propanoic acid (Example 51).
The compounds of formula (I) are inhibitors of TAFIa. Inhibition of TAFIa can be demonstrated using an assay based on the method of Boffa et al. (J. Biol. Chem. 1998, 273, 2127) as further described below. The activity of the compounds is characterized by a calculated Kj value. Generally the compounds of the present invention have a Ki value of 10μM or less. Better compounds have a Kj value of 1μM or less, or even 100nM or less. The most potent compounds have a Kj value of 25nM or less.
The compounds of formula (I) are selective for TAFIa over other carboxypeptidases, and particularly carboxypeptidase N (CPN). Unwanted inhibition of CPN is considered to be the most likely cause of undesirable side effects in clinical use. Selectivity can be expressed as the ratio of the Ki for TAFIa to the Kj for CPN.
Generally the compounds of the present invention have a selectivity ratio of at least 5. Better compounds have a selectivity ratio of at least 10. The most selective compounds have a selectivity ratio of at least 50.
The compounds of formula (I) may be prepared according to the general methods which are described below and in the Examples and Preparations section. These methods provide a further aspect of the present invention. Nevertheless, the skilled man will appreciate that the compounds of the invention could be made by methods other than those herein described, by adaptation of the methods herein described and/or adaptation of a plethora of methods known in the art. It is to be understood that the synthetic transformation methods specifically mentioned herein may be carried out in various different sequences in order that the desired substances can be efficiently assembled. The skilled chemist will exercise his judgement and skill as to the most efficient sequence of reactions for the synthesis of a given target substance.
It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that sensitive functional groups may need to be protected and deprotected during the synthesis of a substance of the invention. This may be achieved by conventional techniques, for example as described by T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts ("Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", 3RD edition, Wiley-lnterscience, NY, 1999).
Compounds of formula (I) may be prepared from the corresponding esters of formula
(II) (wherein P1 is a lower alkyl group, a benzyl group or any other carboxyl protecting group).
Figure imgf000015_0001
OO (I)
P1 is preferably a lower alkyl group such as methyl or ethyl, in which case suitable conditions for this step include treatment with NaOH in dioxan for 1 -3 days.
Compounds of formula (II) may be prepared from the corresponding protected amines of formula (III) (wherein P2 is a te/f-butyloxycarbonyl, benzyloxycarbonyl or fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl group, or any other amine protecting group). Where R9 is H then the preparation involves only a deprotection step. Where R9 is other than H then a further step is necessary to introduce R9, such as a reductive amination reaction.
Figure imgf000015_0002
(III) (ll, R9 = H) (ii) Alternatively, compounds of formula (III) may be converted to the corresponding acids (IV) prior to deprotecting the amine to give the compounds of formula (I).
Figure imgf000016_0001
(III) (IV)
Figure imgf000016_0002
(I, R9 = H) (0
Compounds of formula (III) may be prepared from imidazoleacetic acid derivatives of formula (V), wherein X is a leaving group such as a chlorine, bromine or iodine atom, or a methanesulphonate or trifluoromethanesulphonate group, by reaction with a alcohol of formula (VI).
Figure imgf000016_0003
(III) Compounds of formula (V) may be prepared from the corresponding hydroxyacid derivatives of formula (VII) or, where X is Br, by direct halogenation of the esters of formula (VIII).
Figure imgf000017_0001
(VIII) Compounds of formula (VI), (VII) and (VIII) are known or may be prepared by methods analogous to those used for the preparation of such known compounds.
Compounds of formula (III) may alternatively be prepared from α-hydroxyimidazole- acetic acid derivatives of formula (VII) by reaction with a compound of formula (IX) wherein Y is a leaving group such as a chlorine, bromine or iodine atom, or a methanesulphonate or trifluoromethanesulphonate group.
Figure imgf000017_0002
(ill) Compounds of formula (II) where neither of R8 and R9 are hydrogen may also be prepared from compounds of formula (X). When R3 is hydrogen the transformation may be accomplished by hydrogenation in the presence of a suitable catalyst. When R3 is other than hydrogen the transformation may be accomplished using a reagent such as R3-M, where M is a metal such as lithium or magnesium, in the presence of a copper(l) salt.
Figure imgf000018_0001
(X) (II)
Compounds of formula (X) may be prepared from compounds of formula (XI) by dehydration. The transformation may be accomplished using, for example, methanesulfonyl chloride and a tertiary amine.
Figure imgf000018_0002
<XI> (X)
Compounds of formula (XI) may be prepared by an aldol-type reaction between alkoxy-esters of formula (XII) and aldehydes or ketones of formula (XIII) in the presence of a strong base, such as lithium diisopropylamide.
Figure imgf000018_0003
(XII)
(XI) Compounds of formula (Xlll) are generally known, or may be prepared by methods analogous to published methods. Compounds of formula (XII) may be prepared by reacting the corresponding amino-alcohols R8R9NC(R6)(R7)(CH2)nC(R4)(R5)OH with a bromoacetate BrCH2C02P1 in the presence of a base such as sodium hydride.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R9 is hydrogen may alternatively be prepared by the hydrolysis of lactams of formula (XIV).
Figure imgf000019_0001
(I, R9 = H) Compounds of formula (XIV) may be prepared from the corresponding unsaturated compounds of formula (XV). When R3 is hydrogen the transformation may be accomplished by hydrogenation in the presence of a suitable catalyst. When R3 is other than hydrogen the transformation may be accomplished using a reagent such as R3-M, where M is a metal such as lithium or magnesium, in the presence of a copper(l) salt.
Figure imgf000019_0002
(XV) (χ'v) Compounds of formula (XV) may be prepared by dehydration of alcohols of formula (XVI).
Figure imgf000020_0001
(XVI) (XV)
Compounds of formula (XVI) may be prepared by reacting an aldehyde or ketone of formula (Xlll) with a lactam of formula (XVII) in the presence of a strong base, such as lithium diisopropylamide.
Figure imgf000020_0002
(XVII) (XVI)
Compounds of formula (XVII) may be prepared from aminoalcohols of formula (XVIII) by reaction with chloroacetyl chloride. Compounds of formula (XVIII) are generally known, or may be prepared by adaptation of generally known methods.
Figure imgf000020_0003
(XVIII)
(XVII) When R8 is H, the foregoing method can be problematic, particu jllaarrllyy a at the step involving the reaction of compounds of formula (Xlll) and (XVII). It is generally convenient in this case to use a protected aminoalcohol of formula (XVIIIa), where P3 is a nitrogen protecting group. A particularly useful embodiment of P3 is the 4-methoxybenzyl group. This may be removed following the elaboration of intermediate (XlVa) by treatment with eerie ammonium nitrate.
Figure imgf000021_0001
(XVIIIa) (XlVa) (XIV, R8 = H)
When R1 is H it may be necessary or convenient to protect the imidazole as its trityl derivative. Accordingly, when R1 is H, compounds of formula (XIX), (XX) or (XXI) may be elaborated by the foregoing methods to provide compounds of formula (XXII) which, upon deprotection, give compounds of formula (III).
Figure imgf000021_0002
(XXI) This route may also be useful for the preparation of certain compounds according to formula (I) wherein R1 is attached at the N1 position of the imidazole ring. Compounds of formula (III) wherein R1 is H may be alkylated or arylated to give compounds of formula (III) wherein R1 is other than H and is attached at the N1 position.
Figure imgf000022_0001
(XXII) (III, R1 = H) (Ml, R1 at N1)
When R1 is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group it may be introduced in an alkylation reaction. Suitable conditions for this step include treatment with 1.1 eq of cesium carbonate and 1.1 eq of an alkylating agent in N(N-dimethylformamide, or with sodium hydride and 1.1 eq of an alkylating agent in THF. Suitable alkylating reagents include R1-CI, R1-Br, R1-l, R1-OS02CH3 and R1-OS02CF3. When R1 is Aryl or Aromatic heterocycle it may be introduced in an arylation reaction. Suitable conditions for this step include treatment with 2eq of Aryl-B(OH)2 or Aromatic heterocycle-B(OH)2 in the presence of 1.5 eq of copper acetate, 2eq of pyridine, air and 4A molecular sieves.
For the compounds of formula (I) wherein the imidazole is 2,4- or 2,5-disubstituted, it may also be convenient or necessary to use a protecting group at the N1 position.
The compounds of formula (I) are useful as therapeutic agents. The compounds will generally be formulated so as to be amenable to administration to the subject by the chosen route. In a further aspect, therefore, the present invention provides for a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, diluent or carrier selected with regard to the intended route of administration and standard pharmaceutical practice. For example, the compounds of formula (I) can be administered orally, buccally or sublingually in the form of tablets, capsules, ovules, elixirs, solutions or suspensions. These formulations may contain flavouring or colouring agents, and may be adapted for immediate-, delayed-, modified-, sustained-, pulsed- or controlled-release applications. Tablets may contain excipients such as microcrystalline cellulose, lactose, sodium citrate, calcium carbonate, dibasic calcium phosphate and glycine, disintegrants such as starch (preferably corn, potato or tapioca starch), sodium starch glycollate, croscarmellose sodium and certain complex silicates, and granulation binders such as polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (HPMC), hydroxypropyl- cellulose (HPC), sucrose, gelatin and acacia. Additionally, lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid, glyceryl behenate and talc may be included.
Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in gelatin capsules. Preferred excipients in this regard include lactose, starch, cellulose and derivatives thereof, milk sugar and high molecular weight polyethylene glycols.
For solutions, suspensions and elixirs, the compounds of formula (I) may be combined with various sweetening or flavouring agents, colouring matter or dyes, with emulsifying and/or suspending agents, and with diluents such as water, ethanol, propylene glycol and glycerin, and combinations thereof.
The compounds of formula (I) may also be administered in the form of a solution- or suspension-filled soft or hard gelatin capsule. Such capsules are generally made of gelatin, glycerin, water and sorbitol. Hard capsules are distinguished from soft capsules by containing less water and thus having a correspondingly stronger shell. Additional excipients suitable for use in such capsules include propylene glycol, ethanol, water, glycerol and edible oils.
The compounds of formula (I) can also be administered parenterally, for example, intravenously, intra-arterially, intraperitoneally, intrathecally, intraventricularly, intraurethrally, intrasternally, intracranially, intramuscularly or subcutaneously. Such administration may be as a single bolus injection or as a short- or long-duration infusion. For such parenteral administration the compounds are preferably formulated as a sterile solution in water or another suitable solvent or mixture of solvents. The solution may contain other substances such as: salts, particularly sodium chloride, and sugars, particularly glucose or mannitol, to make the solution isotonic with blood; buffering agents such as acetic, citric and phosphoric acids and their sodium salts, such that the pH of the solution is preferably between 3 and 9; and preservatives. The preparation of suitable parenteral formulations under sterile conditions is readily accomplished by standard pharmaceutical techniques well known to those skilled in the art.
The compounds of formula (I) can also be administered intranasally or by inhalation and are conveniently delivered in the form of a dry powder inhaler or an aerosol spray presentation from a pressurised container, pump, spray, atomiser or nebuliser, with or without the use of a suitable propellant such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, a hydrofluoroalkane such as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFA 134A™) or 1 ,1 ,1 , 2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane (HFA 227EA™), carbon dioxide or other suitable gas. In the case of a pressurised aerosol, the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount. The pressurised container, pump, spray, atomiser or nebuliser may contain a solution or suspension of the active compound, e.g. using a mixture of ethanol and the propellant as the solvent, which may additionally contain a lubricant, e.g. sorbitan trioleate. Capsules and cartridges (made, for example, from gelatin) for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated to contain a powder mix of a compound of the formula (I) and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
Alternatively, the compounds of formula (I) can be administered by the vaginal or rectal routes in the form of a suppository or pessary, or The compounds of formula (I) may also be administered dermally or transdermally, for example, by the use of a skin patch.
Alternatively, the compounds of formula (I) can be applied topically in the form of a gel, hydrogel, lotion, solution, cream, ointment or dusting powder. Suitable ointments may contain the active compound suspended or dissolved in, for example, a mixture with one or more of the following: mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white petrolatum, propylene glycol, polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene compound, emulsifying wax and water. Suitable lotions or creams may contain the active compound suspended or dissolved in, for example, a mixture of one or more of the following: mineral oil, sorbitan monostearate, a polyethylene glycol, liquid paraffin, polysorbate 60, cetyl esters wax, cetearyl alcohol, 2-octyldodecanol, benzyl alcohol and water.
Alternatively, the compounds of formula (I) may be administered by the ocular route. For ophthalmic use, the compounds can be formulated as micronised suspensions in isotonic, pH adjusted, sterile saline, or, preferably, as solutions in isotonic, pH adjusted, sterile saline, optionally in combination with a preservative such as a benzylalkonium chloride. Alternatively, they may be formulated in an ointment such as petrolatum.
The compounds of formula (I) may also be used in combination with a cydodextrin. Cyclodextrins are known to form inclusion and non-inclusion complexes with drug molecules. Formation of a drug-cyclodextrin complex may modify the solubility, dissolution rate, bioavailability and/or stability property of a drug molecule. Drug- cyclodextrin complexes are generally useful for most dosage forms and administration routes. As an alternative to direct complexation with the drug the cydodextrin may be used as an auxiliary additive, e.g. as a carrier, diluent or solubiliser. Alpha-, beta- and gamma-cyclodextrins are most commonly used and suitable examples are described in W091/11172, WO94/02518 and W098/55148.
Because the compounds of formula (I) are inhibitors of TAFIa they are useful as therapeutic agents in pathologies in which inhibition of TAFIa is beneficial. In a further aspect, therefore, the present invention provides for a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof for use as a medicament. In particular, the present invention provides for the use of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of a condition selected from thrombotic conditions, atherosclerosis, adhesions, dermal scarring, cancer, fibrotic conditions, inflammatory diseases and those conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing bradykinin levels in the body. The utility of TAFIa inhibitors for the treatment of thrombotic conditions derives from their potential to promote fibrinolysis while not interfering with coagulation. In most clinically relevant situations thrombus formation is sub-acute, i.e. the thrombus forms slowly. Conventional anti-thrombotic agents block the coagulation pathway and so prevent thrombus growth, but as an unavoidable consequence they also block the clotting response to vascular damage, which results in an increased incidence of hemorrhaging. By promoting fibrinolysis, TAFIa inhibitors accelerate the dissolution of the developing thrombus without interfering with the clotting response. Accordingly, one preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of a compound of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of a thrombotic condition selected from myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, stroke, young stroke, cerebral infarction, cerebral thrombosis, cerebral embolism, peripheral vascular disease, angina and other forms of acute coronary syndromes, disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis, pulmonary embolism, embolic events secondary to cardiac arrhythmias and the prevention of cardiovascular events following surgical revascularisation or intervention, or for improving the outcome of organ transplantation by reducing blood clotting and so preserving organ function. Cardiovascular events following intervention surgery include conditions such as restenosis or reocdusion following interventions such as percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, grafting, stent in-placement, coronary bypass surgery or any other forms of surgical revascularisation or intervention. Disseminated intravascular coagulation includes all conditions resulting from intravascular activation of the coagulation process. This might occur acutely through the release of procoagulant substances (eg. obstetric emergencies, snakebite, crush injury malignancy), by abnormal contact of the blood (eg. infections, burns, extracorporeal circulation, grafts) or though generation of procoagulants in the blood (transfusion reactions, leukemia); or chronically, (eg. toxemia, malignant hypertension, severe liver cirrhosis). Deep vein thrombosis also encompasses what is known as 'economy class syndrome', where clots form in subjects forced to endure cramped conditions for a period of time, such as those sitting in the economy class seats of an aeroplane.
A role for thrombus formation in the pathophysiology of atherosclerosis has recently been highlighted by several independent groups. Non-ocdusive thrombi not only restrict blood flow leading to myocardial ischemia and angina pectoris but also, due to incomplete endogenous lysis, may be incorporated into the arterial wall as solidified plaque material enhancing the atherosclerotic process. Long-term administration of a TAFIa inhibitor promotes the lysis of developing thrombi and therefore provides a safe and efficacious treatment which alleviates the symptoms of angina pectoris while impairing the progression of the underlying disease. Conventional treatment of myocardial ischaemia in clinically stable coronary artery disease is predominately designed to reduce cardiac workload and enhance blood flow. Such approaches clearly reduce myocardial ischaemia thus increasing quality of life. However, these strategies have little effect on the pathogenesis of coronary atherosclerosis which is a chronic process of continuous remodeling of the vascular tree in response to varying degrees of vascular injury. Accordingly, another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of atherosclerosis, including atherosclerosis as a consequence of peripheral vascular disease, insulin resistance and Syndrome X, and further including myocardial ischaemia and angina pectoris resulting from atherosclerosis. Atherosclerosis is taken to include both primary and secondary coronary artery disease, in which atherosclerosis restricts the blood supply to the heart. Primary prevention of coronary artery disease means preventing the onset of ischemic complications such as myocardial infarction in patients with no history of coronary artery disease but who have one or more risk factors. Secondary prevention of coronary artery disease means preventing ischemic complications in patients with established coronary artery disease, such as patients who have had a previous myocardial infarction. Syndrome X is a term often used to group together a number of interrelated diseases. The first stage of syndrome X consists of insulin resistance, abnormal cholesterol and triglyceride levels, obesity and hypertension. Any one of these conditions may be used to diagnose the start of Syndrome X. The disease may then progress with one condition leading to the development of another in the group. For example insulin resistance is associated with high lipid levels, hypertension and obesity. The disease then cascades, with the development of each additional condition increasing the risk of developing more serious diseases. This can progress to the development of diabetes, kidney disease and heart disease. These diseases may lead to stroke, myocardial infarction and organ failure. Atherosclerosis is common in patients with Syndrome X.
TAFIa inhibitors are also effective in preventing the formation of adhesions in the body. Most surgical procedures and physical traumas result in bleeding into the cavities between tissues. The blood which collects at these sites then clots forming fibrin-rich thrombi. These thrombi bridge the gaps between adjacent tissues and act as foci for the accumulation of inflammatory cells and fibroblasts. Invading fibroblasts lay down a collagen-rich extracellular matrix which strengthens the adhesion of the tissues producing a firm bond which may then restrict movement. Adhesions have been characterised according to their location and may result following any surgery, e.g. abdominal, orthopaedic, neurological, cardiovascular and ocular surgery. This inappropriate adhesion of tissues post-surgery or trauma is a major issue which can lead to various outcomes, e.g. "aches and pains", "twinges", local inflammation, restriction in mobility, pain, intestinal obstruction and sometimes, in the most severe cases, death. In the case of gynaecological surgery, infertility may result. Additionally clots forming fibrin-rich thrombi are implicated in dermal scarring and restenosis. Without being bound by any theory, it is believed that adhesion formation may be enhanced when a deficiency in fibrinolysis results in enhanced and maintained clot formation. Treatment with a TAFIa inhibitor around and/or after surgical intervention may enhance fibrinolysis of the fibrin-rich thrombi and hence inhibit thrombus formation, accretion and stabilization, thereby inhibiting adhesion formation. A TAFIa inhibitor given either locally as a topical application or systemically may be seen to be of benefit in a range of surgical procedures. In addition, administration of a TAFIa inhibitor may be used to treat adhesions resulting from other forms of non-surgical physical trauma where this has caused internal bleeding. Examples of such trauma might include sporting injuries or anything else resulting in a tear, cut, bruise or induration of the body. Accordingly, another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of adhesions or dermal scarring.
TAFIa inhibitors are also effective in inhibiting tumour maturation, progression and metastasis. Without being bound by any theory, it is believed that the hemostatic system is involved at several levels of cancer pathology, including neovascularisation, shedding of cells from the primary tumour, invasion of the blood supply, adherence to the vessel wall and growth at the metastatic site. It is thought that the efficacy of TAFIa inhibitors stems from an ability to reduce fibrin deposition around solid tumours and thereby inhibit the above processes. Accordingly, another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of cancer.
TAFIa inhibitors are efficacious in treatment of any condition in which fibrosis is a contributing factor. Suitable fibrotic conditions include cystic fibrosis, pulmonary fibrotic diseases such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), fibromuscular dysplasia and fibrotic lung disease, and fibrin deposition in the eye during opthalmic surgery. Accordingly, another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of fibrotic disease, and in particular for the treatment or prevention of a fibrotic condition selected from cystic fibrosis, pulmonary fibrotic diseases, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), fibromuscular dysplasia, fibrotic lung disease and fibrin deposition in the eye during opthalmic surgery.
TAFIa inhibitors are efficacious in the treatment of inflammation, inflammatory diseases such as asthma, arthritis, endometriosis, inflammatory bowel diseases, psoriasis and atopic dermatitis and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's disease and Parkinson's disease. Accordingly, another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of inflammation, inflammatory diseases such as asthma, arthritis, endometriosis, inflammatory bowel diseases, psoriasis and atopic dermatitis and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's disease and Parkinson's disease.
TAFIa binds to and breaks down bradykinin (Tan et al., Biochemistry 1995, 34, 5811). There are many conditions which are known to benefit from maintaining or enhancing levels of bradykinin such as hypertension, angina, heart failure, pulmonary hypertension, renal failure and organ failure. Accordingly, another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for the use of compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing levels of bradykinin.
In a further aspect, the present invention provides a method of treating or preventing thrombotic conditions, atherosclerosis, adhesions, dermal scarring, cancer, fibrotic conditions, inflammatory diseases and those conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing bradykinin levels in the body which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
One preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing thrombosis, particularly myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, stroke, young stroke, cerebral infarction, cerebral thrombosis, cerebral embolism, peripheral vascular disease, angina and other forms of acute coronary syndromes, disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis, pulmonary embolism, embolic events secondary to cardiac arrhythmias and preventing cardiovascular events following intervention surgery which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment. Subjects with thrombotic conditions who are suitable for treatment by the present invention include those having conditions associated with hypercoagulability, such as factor V mutation, antithrombin III deficiency, heparin cof actor II deficiency, protein C deficiency, protein S deficiency and polycythemia vera, and those exhibiting homocystinaemia or homocystinuria.
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing atherosclerosis which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment. Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing adhesions or dermal scarring which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing cancer which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing a fibrotic condition such as cystic fibrosis, pulmonary fibrotic diseases, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), fibromuscular dysplasia, fibrotic lung disease and fibrin deposition in the eye during ophthalmic surgery which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing an inflammatory disease such as asthma, arthritis, endometriosis, inflammatory bowel diseases, psoriasis or atopic dermatitis or a neurodegenerative disease such as Alzheimer's disease or Parkinson's disease which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing levels of bradykinin which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof to a patient in need of such treatment.
It is to be appreciated that all references herein to treatment include curative, palliative and prophylactic treatment. The amount of compound administered and the frequency of administration will be determined by the attending physician taking into account the characteristics of the patient, such as age, weight and state of health, and the degree of inhibition of TAFIa desired. The total daily dose for a typical 70kg adult will generally be between 1mg and 5g, preferably between 10mg and 1g, more preferably between 50mg and 750mg. The total dose may be given as a single or divided dose.
The compounds of the present invention may be used alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents. When used in combination with another therapeutic agent the administration of the two agents may be simultaneous or sequential. Simultaneous administration includes the administration of a single dosage form that comprises both agents and the administration of the two agents in separate dosage forms at substantially the same time. Sequential administration includes the administration of the two agents according to different schedules provided that there is an overlap in the periods during which the treatment is provided. Suitable agents with which the compounds of formula (I) can be co-administered include antithrombotics, including antiplatelet agents, anticoagulants and profibrinolytics. Suitable antithrombotics include: aspirin, Plavix™, ticlopidine, warfarin (Coumadin™), unfractionated heparin, hirudin (Lepirudin™), streptokinase, urokinase, recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (tPA), dipyridamole, Reopro™, Aggrastat™, and Integrilin™. The compounds of formula (I) can also be administered together with antihypertensive agents and with agents to treat dyslipidaemia such as statins eg Lipitor™. Further suitable drug classes for co-administration include Factor X inhibitors and antiarrhythmics such as amiodarone or digoxin. Accordingly, in a further aspect, the present invention provides for the use of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof in combination with an antithrombotic agent for the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of thrombosis. In a preferred embodiment the antithrombotic is an profibrinolytic. In a more preferred embodiment the antithrombotic is recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (tPA). In a further aspect, the present invention provides for a method of treating or preventing thrombosis, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof in combination with an antithrombotic to a patient in need of such treatment. In a preferred embodiment the antithrombotic is a profibrinolytic. In a more preferred embodiment the antithrombotic is recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (tPA).
In a further aspect, the present invention provides for a kit comprising: a) a composition comprising a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof as disclosed herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier; b) a composition comprising an antithrombotic and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier; and c) a container
The components of this kit may be administered separately, simultaneously or sequentially.
The present invention also provides for the use a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof as a coating on intravascular devices such as indwelling catheters for dialysis, replacement heart valves or arterial stents; and as a coating on extra- corporeal blood circulation devices such as heart, lung and kidney dialysis machines, to prevent thrombosis, particularly myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, stroke, young stroke, cerebral infarction, cerebral thrombosis, cerebral embolism, peripheral vascular disease, angina and other forms of acute coronary syndromes, disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis, pulmonary embolism, embolic events secondary to cardiac arrhythmias and the prevention of cardiovascular events such as restenosis following intervention surgery such as percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, grafting, stent in-placement, coronary bypass surgery or any other forms of surgical revascularisation or intervention.
The invention provides for intravascular devices, of which the intravascular portion is coated with a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof; and extra corporeal blood circulation devices such as heart, lung and kidney dialysis machines, where the portion coming into contact with the subjects blood is coated with a compound of formula (I) or a stereoisomer, tautomer or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.
The compounds of the present invention are TAFIa inhibitors, whose utility is based upon preventing the reaction between a developing thrombus and TAFIa. It has been found that the compounds of the present invention are also capable of binding to the unactivated TAFI molecule, at the site implicated in the reaction between TAFIa and the developing clot. The use of TAFIa inhibitors as described above in terms of scope and utility, includes such TAFIa inhibitors which bind to TAFI.
The invention is further illustrated by the following, non-limiting examples.
Melting points were determined on a Gallenkamp melting point apparatus using glass capillary tubes and are uncorrected. Unless otherwise indicated all reactions were carried out under a nitrogen atmosphere, using commercially available anhydrous solvents. '0.88 Ammonia' refers to commercially-available aqueous ammonia solution of about 0.88 specific gravity. Thin-layer chromatography was performed on glass-backed pre-coated Merck silica gel (60 F254) plates, and silica gel column chromatography was carried out using 40-63 ΛΠ silica gel (Merck silica gel 60). Ion exchange chromatography was performed using with the specified ion exchange resin which had been pre-washed with deionised water. Proton NMR spectra were measured on a Varian Inova 300, Varian Inova 400, or Varian Mercury 400 spectrometer in the solvents specified. In the NMR spectra, only non- exchangeable protons which appeared distinct from the solvent peaks are reported. Low resolution mass spectra were recorded on either a Fisons Trio 1000, using thermospray positive ionisation, or a Finnigan Navigator, using electrospray positive or negative ionisation. High resolution mass spectra were recorded on a Bruker Apex II FT-MS using electrospray positive ionisation. Combustion analyses were conducted by Exeter Analytical UK. Ltd., Uxbridge, Middlesex. Optical rotations were determined at 25°C using a Perkin Elmer 341 polarimeter using the solvents and concentrations specified. Example compounds designated as (+) or (-) optical isomers are assigned based on the sign of optical rotation when determined in a suitable solvent.
Abbreviations and Definitions
Arbocel™ Filtration agent, from J. Rettenmaier & Sohne, Germany Amberlyst® 15 Ion exchange resin, available from Aldrich Chemical Company atm Pressure in atmospheres (1 atm = 760 Torr = 101.3 kPa) Biotage™ Chromatography performed using Flash 75 silica gel cartridge, from Biotage, UK
BOC tert-Butyloxycarbonyl group br Broad c Concentration used for optical rotation measurements in g per 100 ml (1 mg/ml is c O.10) cat Catalytic d Doublet dd Doublet of doublets
Degussa® 101 10 wt% palladium on activated carbon, Degussa type E101 available from Aldrich Chemical Company
Dowex® Ion exchange resin, from Aldrich Chemical Company ee Enantiomeric excess
HRMS High Resolution Mass Spectrocopy (electrospray ionisation positive scan)
Hyflo™ Hyflo supercel®, from Aldrich Chemical Company liq liquid
LRMS Low Resolution Mass Spectroscopy (electrospray or thermospray ionisation positive scan)
LRMS (ES') Low Resolution Mass Spectroscopy (electrospray ionisation negative scan) m Multiplet m/z Mass spectrum peak MCI™ gel High porous polymer, CHP20P 75-150μm, from Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation psi Pounds per square inch (1 psi = 6.9 kPa) q Quartet
Rf Retention factor on TLC s Singlet
Sep-Pak® Reverse phase Cι8 silica gel cartridge, Waters Corporation t Triplet
TLC Thin Layer Chromatography δ Chemical shift
Example 1 (2SH-)-2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-(1 -propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid
Figure imgf000036_0001
A solution of the compound of Preparation 88 (437mg, 1.96mmol) in 6M hydrochloric acid (35ml) was heated at reflux for 72 hours, then allowed to cool and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water (2ml) and the solution was purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using an elution gradient of water:0.88 ammonia (100:0 to 98:2). The product containing fractions were combined and evaporated under reduced pressure, and the product was freeze-dried to afford the title compound, 456mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.82 (t, 3H), 1.70 (m, 2H), 2.80 (m, 1 H), 3.01 (m, 3H), 3.44 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 3H), 3.89 (dd, 1 H), 6.70 (s, 1 H), 7.35 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 264 [MNa+]. Microanalysis found: C, 49.04; H, 8.17; N, 15.51. CιιHi9N3θ3;1.6H20 requires C, 49.04; H, 8.28; N, 15.60%. [α]D = -33.43 (c = 0.193, methanol). Examples 2 to 4 The following compounds of general formula
Figure imgf000037_0001
were prepared from the corresponding morpholinone compounds following the procedure of Example 1.
Figure imgf000037_0002
Example 5 (2SH-)-2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-π -(2-cvclohexylethvh-1 H-imidazol-4-yllpropanoic acid
Figure imgf000038_0001
A solution of the compound of Preparation 133 (72mg, 0.25mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (5ml) was heated at 110°C for 18 hours, then allowed to cool and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water and the solution was purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using an elution gradient of water:0.88 ammonia:methanol (95:5:0 to 90:5:5). The product was dissolved in water (5ml) and freeze-dried to afford the title compound as a sticky gum, 45mg. 1H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 0.99 (m, 2H), 1.21 (m, 4H), 1.61-1.78 (m, 7H), 2.86 (dd, 1 H), 3.02 (m, 3H), 3.58-3.70 (m, 2H), 3.98 (m, 3H), 6.93 (s, 1 H), 7.50 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 310 [MH+]. Microanalysis found: C, 59.56; H, 8.76; N, 12.91. C16H27N3O3;0.75H2O requires C, 59.51 ; H, 8.90; N, 13.01%. [α]D = -23.34 (c = 0.102, methanol).
Example 6 (2S)- -2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-(1 -phenyl-1 /-/-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid
Figure imgf000038_0002
The title compound was obtained as a fawn solid in 87% yield from the morpholinone of Preparation 104, following the procedure of Example 5. 1H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 2.88 (dd, 1 H), 3.00 (dd, 1 H), 3.10 (t, 2H), 3.62 (t, 2H), 4.02 (m, 1 H), 7.30 (s, 1 H), 7.39 (m, 1 H), 7.45 (m, 4H), 7.98 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 298 [MNa+j. Microanalysis found: C, 59.15; H, 6.39; N, 14.71. Cι47N3O3;0.5H2O requires C, 59.14; H, 6.38; N, 14.78%. [α]D = -16.8 (c = 0.10, methanol).
Example 7 (2S)-2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-(1-r3.5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)- propanoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0001
The title compound was obtained as a white solid in 45% yield from the morpholinone of Preparation 106, following the procedure of Example 5. 1 H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 3.00-3.18 (m, 3H), 3.65 (m, 1 H), 3.75 (m, 1 H), 4.04 (m, 2H), 7.58 (s, 1 H), 7.98 (s, 1 H), 8.22 (s, 2H), 8.30 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES ) 410 [M-H ]. Microanalysis found: C, 43.95; H, 3.79; N, 9.99. Cι6H15F6N3θ3;1.25H20 requires C, 44.30; H, 4.07; N, 9.69%.
Example 8 (2 ?S)-2-r(2-(Methylamino)ethoxy1-3-(1 -propyl-1 --imidazol-4-vQpropanoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0002
The title compound was obtained from the morpholinone of Preparation 51 , following the procedure of Example 1. 1 H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 0.70 (t, 3H), 1.62 (m, 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 2.76 (dd, 1 H), 2.84 (dd, 1 H), 3.05 (m, 2H), 3.53-3.63 (m, 2H), 3.80 (t, 2H), 3.94 (dd, 1 H), 6.84 (s, 1 H), 7.50 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 256.2 [MH+].
Example 9 (2r?S)-2-lϊ2-(Dimethylamino)ethoxyl-3-(1 -propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0003
A solution of the protected acid of Preparation 142 (200mg, 0.62mmol) in trifluoroacetic acid (5ml) and dichloromethane (5ml) was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours, then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water and the solution was purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using water:0.88 ammonia (96:4) as eluant. The product containing fractions were concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in water and freeze-dried to afford the title compound as a sticky gum, 100mg. 1 H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 0.66 (t, 3H), 1.60 (m, 2H), 2.60-2.78 (m, 7H), 2.82 (dd, 1 H), 3.14 (m, 2H), 3.57 (m, 1 H), 3.61 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (t, 2H), 3.92 (m, 1 H), 6.82 (s, 1 H), 7.48 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 270.2 [MH4]. Microanalysis found: C, 54.41 ; H, 8.72; N, 14.58. Ci3H23N3O3;H20 requires C, 54.34; H, 8.77; N, 14.62%.
Example 10 (2f?S)-3-(1 -Propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)-2-r(3f7)-pyrrolidin-3-yloxylpropanoic acid
Figure imgf000040_0001
Concentrated hydrochloric acid (3ml) was added to a solution of the protected amino acid of Preparation 143 (232mg, 0.55mmol) in dioxan (2ml), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours, then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water (1ml) and the solution was purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using an elution gradient of water:0.88 ammonia (100:0 to 98:2). The product was freeze-dried to afford the title compound as a white solid, 67mg. 1 H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 0.72 (m, 3H), 1.63 (m, 2H), 1.80, 1.98, 2.08 (3xm, 2H), 2.65, 2.84 (2xm, 3H), 3.03-3.38 (m, 3H), 3.81 (m, 2H), 3.94 (m, 1 H), 4.14 (m, 1 H), 6.89 (m, 1 H), 7.53 (m, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 290 [MNa+]. Example 11 (2 ?S)-2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-(1 -r2- 4'-ethylM .1 '-biphenylM-vhethyll-l H-imidazol-4-yl - propanoic acid
Figure imgf000041_0001
A mixture of the compound of Preparation 121 (170mg, 0.43mmol) and concentrated hydrochloric acid (2ml) was heated at 110°C for 18 hours, then allowed to cool and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was azeotroped with ethanol, methanol and dichloromethane, then purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using an elution gradient of water:0.88 ammonia (100:0 to 98:2) to afford the title compound, 15mg. 1 H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 1.22 (t, 3H), 2.62 (q, 2H), 2.82 (m, 1 H), 2.98 (m, 3H), 3.02 (t, 2H), 3.50-3.62 (m, 2H), 3.90 (m, 1 H), 4.18 (t, 2H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 7.14 (d, 2H), 7.20 (d, 2H), 7.30 (s, 1H), 7.43 (m, 4H). Microanalysis found: C, 64.05; H, 6.99; N, 9.35. C25H29N3θ3;2.7H20 requires C, 64.28; H, 7.21 ; N, 8.99%.
Examples 12 to 14 The following compounds of general formula
Figure imgf000041_0002
were prepared from the corresponding morpholinones following the procedure of Example 11.
Figure imgf000042_0001
Example 15 (2S)-2-Ml ?)-2-Amino-1 -methylethylloxy)-3-M -(2-cvclohexylethv0-1 H-imidazol-4-yll- propanoic acid
CH-
Figure imgf000042_0002
The title compound was obtained in 45% yield from the morpholinone of Preparation 92, following the procedure of Example 11. Η-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 0.94 (m, 4H), 1.18 (m, 4H), 1.59-1.76 (m, 7H), 2.72 (m, 2H), 2.96 (m, 1 H), 3.03 (m, 1 H), 3.26 (m, 1 H), 3.55 (m, 1 H), 3.98 (m, 3H), 6.88 (s, 1 H), 7.48 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 324 [MNa+]. Microanalysis found: C, 58.97; H, 9.01 ; N, 11.85. Ci7H29N3θ3;1.2H20 requires C, 59.18; H, 9.17; N, 12.18%.
Example 16 (2/?S)-2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-π -Phenyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid
Figure imgf000043_0001
A solution of the compound of Preparation 99 (70mg, 0.27mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (2ml) was heated at 110°C for 18 hours, then allowed to cool and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was azeotroped with water, then purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using water:0.88 ammonia (95:5) as eluant to afford the title compound as a pale yellow solid, 50mg. Η-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 2.93-3.14 (m, 3H), 3.24 (m, 1 H), 3.59-3.73 (m, 2H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 7.35 (m, 2H), 7.45 (m, 4H), 7.98 (s, 1H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 298 [MNa*].
Example 17 (2S)-2-(f(1 ff)-2-Amino-1 -methylethyl1oxy)-3-(1 -phenyl-1 --imidazol-4-yl)propanoic
Figure imgf000043_0002
The title compound was obtained in 75% yield from the morpholinone of Preparation 109, following the procedure of Example 16, except that an elution gradient of methanol:water:0.88 ammonia (20:80:5 to 30:65:5) was used for the ion exchange chromatography. 1 H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 0.90 (d, 3H), 2.80 (m, 2H), 3.00 (m, 2H), 3.59 (m, 1 H), 4.14 (dd, 1 H), 7.26 (s, 1 H), 7.37 (m, 1 H), 7.42 (m, 4H), 7.96 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES ) 288 [M-H']. Microanalysis found: C, 58.76; H, 6.72; N, 13.37. C15H19N3θ3;H20 requires C, 58.63; H, 6.89; N, 13.67%. [α]D = -83.0 (c = 0.1 , methanol). Example 18 (2S-2-{ (1 ffl-2-Amino-1 -methylethvnoχy)-3-f 1 -(3'.4'-dichloroM .1 '-biphenvn-3-yl)-1 H- imidazol-4-vflpropanoic acid
Figure imgf000044_0001
The title compound was obtained as a white foam from the morpholinone of Preparation 115, following the procedure of Example 17, except that an elution gradient of water:methanol:0.88 ammonia (75:20:5 to 15:80:5) was used for the ion exchange chromatography. Η-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 1.00 (d, 3H), 2.77 (dd, 1 H), 2.92 (m, 2H), 3.15 (dd, 1 H), 3.59 (m, 1 H), 4.10 (m, 1 H), 7.42 (s, 1 H), 7.50-7.627 (m, 5H), 7.78 (s, 1 H), 7.86 (s, 1 H), 8.10 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 434, 436 [MH+].
Example 19 (2S)-2-ξ\C\ R)-2-Amino-1 -methylethylloxy)-3-M -(4-phenoχyphenyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vn- propanoic acid
Figure imgf000044_0002
A solution of the morpholinone of Preparation 111 (130mg, 0.36mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (10ml) was heated at 110SC for 18 hours, then allowed to cool and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using water:methanol:0.88 ammonia (70:30:5) as eluant. The product was dissolved in water and freeze-dried to afford the title compound as an off-white powder, 70mg. Η-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 1.00 (d, 3H), 2.78 (dd, 1 H), 2.86-3.00 (m, 2H), 3.17 (dd, 1 H), 3.60 (m, 1 H), 4.15 (dd, 1 H), 7.02 (d, 2H), 7.08 (d, 2H), 7.17 (m, 1 H), 7.30 (s, 1 H), 7.39 (m, 2H), 7.50 (d, 2H), 7.95 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 404 [MNa÷]. Microanalysis found: C, 62.70; H, 6.22; N, 10.30. C2ιH23N3θ4;1.2H2O requires C, 62.58; H, 6.35; N, 10.43%. [α]D = -50.9 (c = 0.117, methanol).
Examples 20 to 31 The following compounds of general formula
Figure imgf000045_0001
were prepared by heating a solution of the corresponding morpholinone (0.2 to 0.4mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (2ml) at reflux for 18 hours, concentrating the cooled solution, and azeotroping the residue with ethanol, ethyl acetate and dichloromethane.
Figure imgf000045_0002
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000047_0001
Figure imgf000048_0001
Example 33 (2flS)-2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-n -(3-f 1.1 '-biphenvn-2-ylpropyn-1 ry-imidazol-4-vπ- propanoic acid dihvdrochloride
Figure imgf000049_0001
The title compound was obtained as an off white foam in 30% yield from the compound of Preparation 146, following the procedure of Example 20. 1 H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 1.96 (m, 2H), 2.60'(t?2H)I :3.05-3.23 (m, 4H), 3.79 (m, 2H), 4.02 (t, 2H), 4.48 (m, 1H),7:14 (d,-1H). 7.19- .3θ m?6H) 7:36 fm, 3tf)?§?02-(s? 1 H). Microanalysis found: C, 54.89; H, 6.24; N, 8.35. C23Η27N3θ3;2HCI;2H20 requires C, 54.98; H, 6.62; N, 8.36%'. ' ,
Example 34
(2S)-2-(f(2S)-Aminopropylloxy)-3-ri-(2-cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazόl-4-vnpropanoic acid dihvdrochloride ,
Figure imgf000049_0002
Figure imgf000049_0003
was obtained in 64% yield from the morpholinone of Preparation 95, following the procedure of Example 20. 1 H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 0.80-1.32 (m, 9H), 1.60-1.80 (m, 7H), 3.20 (m, 1 H); 3.57 (m, 3H), 3.80 (m, 1 H), 4.20 (m, 2H), 4.35 (m, ,1Η), 7.' 8 (s;!<1 H),"8.86 (s,-1H).: HRMS: ιχι/z^(ESI)'324.2280„[MH?]. ;»* _r . Example 35 , (2 ?)-2-(f(2ff)-Aminopropyl1oxy)-3-f1-(2-cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1propanoic acid dihvdrochloride
Figure imgf000050_0001
5 The title compound was obtained from the morpholinone of Preparation 96, following the procedure of Example 20. 1 H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 0.80-1.32 (m, 9H), 1.60-1.80 (m, 7H), 3.20 (m, 1 H), 3.57 (m, 3H), 3.80 (m, 1 H), 4.20 (m, 2H), 4.35 (m, 1 H) .48 (s,r H), 8.86 !(s, -J H): HRMS: m/z (ESI)„324.2275 [MH-V- ' X "- ""
0 Example 36. -
(2flSϊ-2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-[1 -(2-methylphenyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vnpropanoic acid
Figure imgf000050_0002
A solution of the morpholinone of Preparation 100 (1 OOmg, 0 37mmol) in . ? 5 concentrated hydrochloric acid (2ml) was heated*, at ,1 0°C for 36 hours, then cooled and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was azeotroped with , :. methanol and dichloromethane to afford the title compound. 1 H-NMR (CD3OD,
400MHz) δ: 2.10, , 3H),.3.19 (m, 2H), 3.26 (m, J H), 3.39 (rτv1H), 3:82 (t,.2H), 4.42
(m, 1 H), 7.40 (m, 2H), 7.46 (m, 2H), 7.62 (s, 1 H),,9.14 (s, 1H). HRMS: m/z 0 290.1502 [MH+]. Example 37 (2ffl-2-f fd S)-2-Amino-1 -methylethvnoxy)-3-n -(2-cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vn- propanoic acid dihvdrochloride
Figure imgf000051_0001
The title compound was obtained from the morpholinone of Preparation 91 , following the procedure of Example 20. 1 H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 1.01 (m, 5H), 1.21 (m,
Figure imgf000051_0002
imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid dihvdrochloride
Figure imgf000051_0003
Figure imgf000051_0004
■•\. ;-ιt"*'i"
X , ■.d',ήv-m . !l>-- mmil :J.. '
Figure imgf000051_0005
' '- " ' ' -'• ■ ' ■■■ ■• ■■- Example 39
(2S)-2- \(l ffl-2-Amino-1 -methylethvπoxy)-3-π -(3-cvclohexyl-3-methylbutvh-1 H- imidazol-4-yllpropanoic acid dihvdrochloride
Figure imgf000052_0001
The title compound was obtained from the morpholinone of Preparation 94, following the procedure of Example 20. ' H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 0.94 (s, 6H), 0.98-1.30 (m, 10H), 1.62 (m, 1 H), 1.78 (m, 6H), 2.90-3.15 (m, 3H), 3.78 (m, 1 H), 4.20 (m, 2H), 4.38 (m, 1 H), 7.52 (s, 1 H), 8.90 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 366 [MH*].
Example 40
2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-M -(3-phenoxyphenyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vπpropanoic acid dihvdrochloride
Figure imgf000052_0002
A solution of the morpholinone of Preparation 102 (25mg, 0.07mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (5ml) was heated at 110°C for 18 hours, then cooled and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water and freeze-dried to afford the title compound as a fawn solid, 35mg. 1 H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 3.04 (m, 3H), 3.18 (dd, 1 H), 3.63 (t, 2H), 4.19 (m, 1 H), 6.98 (d, 2H), 7.06 (m, 3H), 7.19 (d, 1 H), 7.46 (dd, 2H), 7.50 (dd, 1 H), 7.54 (s, 1 H), 8.87 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 368 [MH+]. Examples 41 to 44 The following compounds of general formula
Figure imgf000053_0001
were prepared from the corresponding morpholinones following the procedure of Example 40
Figure imgf000053_0002
Example 45 (2SH-)-2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-ri -(4-tert-butylphenv -1 H-imidazol-4-vπpropanoic acid dihvdrochloride
Figure imgf000054_0001
The title compound was obtained as a fawn solid from the morpholinone of
Preparation 105, following the procedure of Example 40. ' H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 1.20 (s, 9H), 3.04-3.35 (m, 4H), 3.78 (m, 2H), 4.38 (m, 1H), 7.41 (m, 2H), 7.58 (m, 2H), 7.61 (s, 1 H), 8.98 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 332 [MH+]. Microanalysis found: C, 49.58; H, 6.75; N, 9.84. Ci8H25N3θ3;2HCI;175H20 requires C, 49.58; H, 7.06; N, 9.64%. [α]D = -2.00 (c = 0.30, methanol).
Examples 46 to 48 The following compounds of general formula
CH,
Figure imgf000054_0002
were prepared from the corresponding morpholinones following the procedure of Example 40
Figure imgf000054_0003
Figure imgf000055_0001
Example 49 (2S)-2-ir(1 ?)-2-Amino-1 -methylethvnoxy)-3-(1 -r4-(cvclohexyloxy)phenyll-1 H-imidazol-
4-yl)propanoic acid
Figure imgf000055_0002
A solution of the protected amino acid of Preparation 120 in a mixture of 2N hydrochloric acid (1 ml), water (1 ml) and dioxan (1 ml) was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water and purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8- 200 ion exchange resin using water:methanol:0.88 ammonia (48:48:4) as eluant. The product was dissolved in water and freeze-dried to afford the title compound, 25mg. ' H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 0.94 (d, 3H), 1.35 (m, 4H), 1.55 (m, 3H), 172- 2.01 (m, 3H), 2.78-2.97 (m, 2H), 3.10 (m, 2H), 3.60 (m, 1 H), 4.01 (m, 1 H), 4.21 (m, 1 H), 6.92 (d, 2H), 7.01 (s, 1 H), 7.20 (d, 2H), 7.62 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 388 [MHl. Microanalysis found: C, 59.33; H, 7.65; N, 9.80.
Figure imgf000056_0001
requires C, 59.56; H, 7.85; N, 9.92%.
Example 50 (2S)-2-(2-Aminoethoxy)-3-(1 H-imidazol-4-v))propanoic acid dihvdrochloride
Figure imgf000056_0002
A suspension of the morpholinone of Preparation 118 (90mg, 0.24mmol) and lithium hydroxide (32mg, 1.33mmol) in a mixture of water (2ml) and tetrahydrofuran (1 ml) was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours, then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was suspended in concentrated hydrochloric acid (3ml) and the mixture was heated at 110°C for 18 hours, then cooled and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was triturated with acetone and the resulting solid was collected and dried, then recrystallised from methanol/acetone to afford the title compound as a white solid, 12mg. ' H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 3.20 (m, 2H), 3.30 (m, 2H), 3.83 (m, 2H), 4.37 (m, 0.5H), 4.41 (m, 0.5H), 7.41 (s, 1H), 8.81 (s, 1H). LRMS: m/z (ES ) 198 [M-H ].
Example 51 (2S)-2-(r(1 f?)-2-Amino-1 -methylethvπoxy)-3-(1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid
CH,
Figure imgf000056_0003
A solution of the morpholinone of Preparation 105 (320mg, 1.64mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (5ml) was heated at 110°C for 18 hours, then allowed to cool and diluted with water (80ml). The resulting solution was purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using an elution gradient of water:0.88 ammonia (100:0 to 95:5). The product was dissolved in water and freeze-dried to afford the title compound as a colourless foam, 290mg. Η-NMR
(D20, 400MHz) δ: 0.90 (d, 3H), 2.80 (dd, 2H), 2.98 (dd, 2H), 3.57 (m, 1 H), 4.04 (m, 1 H), 6.84 (s, 1 H), 7.60 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 236 [MNa ]. Microanalysis found: C, 46.00; H, 7.41 ; N, 17.81. CgHisNaC jI requires C, 45.85; H, 7.48; N, 17.82%. [α]D = -94.62 (c = 1.72, water).
Alternative synthesis
A mixture of the protected lactone of Preparation 55a (1.58g, 4.42mmol) and methanesulphonic acid (6.5ml) was heated at 70°C for 2.5 hours. The cooled solution was diluted with ether (40ml), the mixture was stirred, and the ether was decanted off. This process was repeated twice. Water was added and the mixture was stirred vigorously then filtered. The filtrate was allowed to stand at room temperature for 24 hours then purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using water:0.88 ammonia (95:5) as eluant, and the fractions obtained were evaporated under reduced pressure (with water-bath temperature below 33°C). The product obtained was dissolved in concentrated hydrochloric acid (5ml), and the solution was heated at 100°C for 18 hours, then cooled and diluted with water (30ml). This solution was purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using water:0.88 ammonia (95:5) as eluant. The product was stirred in acetonitrile (10ml) for 1 hour, filtered and dried in vacuo for 18 hours. Microanalysis found: C, 46.58; H, 7.50; N, 17.98. C9H15N3.1 H2θ requires C, 46.75; H, 7.41 ; N. 18.17%.
Example 52 (2S -2-Ml 7)-2-Amino-1 -methylethylloxyl-3-n -(2-pyridinvn-1 H-imidazol-4-vπ- propanoic acid dihvdrochloride
Figure imgf000057_0001
A solution of the morpholinone of Preparation 152 (72mg, 0.26mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (3ml) was heated at 100°C for 18 hours, then allowed to cool, diluted with water, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin using an elution gradient of water:0.88 ammonia (100:0 to 95:5). The product was dissolved in 2N hydrochloric acid and the resulting solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water (10ml) and freeze-dried to afford the title compound as a solid, 58mg. ' H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) (mixture of imidazole regioisomers) δ: 0.79, 0.99 (2xd, 3H), 2.56, 2.92 (2xm, 1 H), 3.02-3.44 (m, 3H), 3.58, 3.78 (2xm, 1 H), 7.55 (m, 1H), 7.71 (m, 1 H), 7.96-8.19 (m, 2H), 8.52, 8.61 (2xm, 1 H), 9.03, 9.38 (2xs, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 291 [MH+].
Example 53 (2S)-2-(f(1 r7)-2-Amino-1 -methylethylloxy)-3-(1 -propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid
Figure imgf000058_0001
A solution of the compound of Preparation 157 (560mg, 2.36mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (10ml) was stirred at 110°C for 18 hours. The cooled solution was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by column chromatography on ion-exchange resin (Dowex® 50WX8-200) using an elution gradient of water:0.88 ammonia (100:0 to 95:5) to afford the title compound as a foam, 350mg. Η-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 0.66 (t, 3H), 0.81 (d, 3H), 1.60 (m, 2H), 2.60-278 (m, 2H), 2.80-2.98 (m, 2H), 3.45 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (t, 2H), 3.98 (dd, 1 H), 6.82 (s, 1 H), 7.43 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 278 [MNa^. Microanalysis found: C, 53.44; H, 8.13; N, 15.40 C12H21N3O3;0.8H2O requires C, 53.44; H, 8.45; N, 15.58%. [α]D = -86.93° (c = 0.11 , methanol) Example 54 (2R)-2-(Ul /?)-2-Amino-1-methylethylloxy)-3-(1 H-imidazol-4-vπpropanoic acid
Figure imgf000059_0001
A mixture of the lactam of Preparation 158 (80mg, O.δOmmol) and 2N hydrochloric acid (2ml) was heated at 110°C for 16 hours, then allowed to cool and diluted with water (10ml). This solution was purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8 resin, using water:0.88 ammonia (95:5) as eluant. The product was triturated with acetone and the resulting solid was dried in vacuo to afford the title compound as a brown solid, 68mg. ' H-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 1.00 (d, 3H), 2.76 (dd, 2H), 2.83 (m, 2H), 3.60 (m, 1 H), 3.86 (m, 1 H), 6.79 (s, 1 H), 7.57 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 1 1 -n-Propyl-1 H-imidazole-4-carboxaldehvde
Figure imgf000059_0002
lmidazole-4-carboxaldehyde (30g, 0.31 mol) was added portionwise to a solution of sodium hydride (13.9g, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.348mol) in tetrahydrofuran (450ml), and the solution was stirred for 45 minutes. n-Propyl bromide (31.2ml, 0.344mol) was then added portionwise, followed by 18-crown-6 (150mg), and the mixture was heated under reflux for 18 hours. Aqueous ammonium chloride solution was added to the cooled solution, and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (2x) and dichloromethane (2x). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 ), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel, eluting with ethyl acetate: pentane (40:60), to give the title compound, 20.2g, 47% yield. 1 H-NMR (DMSO-d6, 400MHz) δ : 0.80 (t, 3H), 176 (m, 2H), 3.98 (t, 2H), 7.84 (s, 1 H), 8.04 (s, 1 H), 9.70 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 277.3 [2M+H]+ Preparation 2 1 -n-Butyl-1 H-imidazole-4-carboxaldehvde
Figure imgf000060_0001
The title compound was obtained in 28% yield from imidazole-4-carboxaldehyde and n-butyl bromide, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 1. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 300MHz) δ: 0.97 (t, 3H), 1.37 (m, 2H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 4.00 (t, 2H), 7.55 (s, 1 H), 7.62 (s, 1 H), 9.88 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 153.3 [MH ].
Preparation 3 1 -(2-Cvclohexylethyl)-1 /-/-imidazole-4-carboxaldehvde
Figure imgf000060_0002
lmidazole-4-carboxaldehyde (4.8g, 50mmol) was added portionwise to a suspension of sodium hydride (2.20g, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 55mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (150ml), and the mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. 2- Cydohexylethyl bromide (8.6ml, 55mmol) was added, and the mixture was heated under reflux for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between water (500ml) and dichloromethane (500ml). The layers were separated, and the organic phase was dried (MgS0 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of toluene:ethyl acetate (100:0 to 96:4) to afford the title compound, 178g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.98 (m, 2H), 1.20 (m, 4H), 1.68 (m, 7H), 4.00 (t, 2H), 7.4 (s, 1 H), 7.60 (s, 1 H), 9.80 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 207.2 [MH+].
Preparation 4
1 -(2-Phenylethvh-l /--imidazole-4-carboxaldehvde
Figure imgf000060_0003
lmidazole-4-carboxaldehyde (673g, 70mmol) was added portionwise to a suspension of sodium hydride (1.68g, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 70mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (280ml), and the mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. (2-Bromoethyl)benzene (9.56ml, 70mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 hours. The mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between water (300ml) and dichloromethane (500ml), and the layers were separated. The organic phase was dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was pre-adsorbed onto silica gel, and purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:pentane (50:50 to 100:0) to afford the title compound, 1.44g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.16 (t, 2H), 4.23 (t, 2H), 7.02 (d, 2H), 7.28 (m, 3H), 7.36 (s, 1 H), 7.50 (s, 1 H), 9.83 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 223 [MNa*].
Preparation 5
1 -Trityl-1 H-imidazole-4-carboxaldehvde
Figure imgf000061_0001
A solution of trityl chloride (9.5g, 34.3mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (50ml) was added dropwise to an ice-cooled solution of imidazole-4-carboxaldehyde (3g, 31.2mmol) and triethylamine (17ml, 125mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (30ml) and the solution was stirred for 2 hours. The reaction was then allowed to warm to room temperature, and was stirred for a further 18 hours. Water (200ml) was added, and the resulting pink solid was collected and dried, then dissolved in dichloromethane (200ml). The resulting solution was washed with water (2x100ml), dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was recrystallised from ethanol to afford the title compound as a solid, 7.8g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 7.06 (m, 6H), 7.32 (m, 9H), 7.48 (s, 1 H), 7.58 (s, 1 H), 9.82 (s, 1 H). Microanalysis found: C, 81.54; H, 5.37; N, 8.24. C23H18N2O requires C, 81.63; H, 5.36; N, 8.28%. Preparation 6 2-r(4-Methoxybenzyl)aminolethanol
Figure imgf000062_0001
Acetic acid (ca. 150ml) was added to a solution of p-anisaldehyde (58.2g, 0.42mol) and ethanolamine (152ml, 2.52mol) in methanol (1 L), to achieve a pH of 6. Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (100g, 0.47mol) was added portionwise, and once addition was complete, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 hours. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, basified using 1 N sodium hydroxide solution and extracted with dichloromethane (10x300ml). The combined extracts were evaporated and the crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol (98:2 to 90:10) to afford the title compound, 42g. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 2.78 (t, 2H), 3.62 (t, 2H), 3.75 (m, 5H), 4.24 (s, 2H), 6.81 (d, 2H), 7.22 (d, 2H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 182 [MH+].
Preparation 7 (2f7)-1-f(4-Methoxybenzyl)amino1-2-propanol
Figure imgf000062_0002
A solution of ( ?)-(-)- 1 -amino-2-propanol (9.00g, 0.12mol) in tetrahydrofuran (40ml) and acetic acid (5ml) was added dropwise to a solution of p-anisaldehyde (5.45g, 0.04mol) in tetrahydrofuran (40ml), and once addition was complete, the solution was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The solution was cooled in an ice- bath, and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (9.50g, 0.0.045mol) was added portionwise, and then the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between dichloromethane (150ml) and sodium hydroxide solution (150ml, 0.5N). The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was saturated with sodium chloride, then extracted with further dichloromethane (3x30ml). The combined organic solutions were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel (gradient elution 98:2:0.2 to 97:3:0.3 dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 NH3) to afford an orange oil (4.9g). 1 H-NMR (CDCI3> 400MHz) δ: 1.12 (d, 3H), 2.39 (dd, 1 H), 2.70 (dd, 1 H), 3.62-379 (m, 6H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.19 (d, 2H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 196 [MH+].
Preparation 8 (2Sπ-r(4-Methoxybenzvπamino1-2-propanol
Figure imgf000063_0001
A mixture of (S)-(+)-1-amino-2-propanol (9g, 0.12mol), p-anisaldehyde (5.45g, 0.04mol), acetic acid (5ml), and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (9.5g, 0.045mol) in methanol (80ml) was stirred at room temperature for 72 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between dichloromethane (150ml) and sodium hydroxide solution (100ml, 0.5N). The layers were separated, and the aqueous phase was extracted with further dichloromethane (4x30ml). The combined organic solutions were dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residual yellow oil was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound, 6.2g. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.10 (d, 3H), 2.24-2.40 (m, 2H), 2.65 (dd, 1 H), 3.62-3.80 (m, 6H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.19 (d, 2H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 218 [MNa÷]
Preparation 9 (2 ?)-2-r(4-Methoxybenzyl)amino1-1-propanol
Figure imgf000063_0002
(r?)-(-)-2-Amino-1-propanol (10.36ml, 133mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of p-anisaldehyde (5.85g, 42.9mmol) in methanol (90ml), and the solution was cooled in an ice-bath. Acetic acid (2.5ml) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (10.0g, 47.2mmol) were added and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature over an hour. The solution was warmed to 40°C and stirred for a further 48 hours then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (50ml) and dichloromethane (100ml) and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with further dichloromethane (10x50ml), and the combined organic solutions were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified twice by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (97:3:0.3 to 90:10:1) to afford the title compound, 6.0g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.04 (d, 3H), 2.80 (m, 1 H), 322 (dd, 1 H), 3.58 (dd, 1 H), 3.62 (d, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 4H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.20 (d, 2H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 196 [MH+]. [α]D = -34.85 (c = 0.137, methanol)
Preparation 10 (25)-2-r(4-Methoxybenzyl)amino1-1-propanol
Figure imgf000064_0001
The title compound was obtained in 67% yield from (S)-(+)-2-amino-1-propanol and p-anisaldehyde, following the procedure described in Preparation 9. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.08 (d, 3H), 2.83 (m, 1 H), 3.30 (dd, 1 H), 3.59 (dd, 1 H), 3.66 (d, 1 H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 3.82 (d, 1 H), 4.08 (bs, 2H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.22 (d, 2H). [α]D = +39.19 (c = 0.146, methanol)
Preparation 11 4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000064_0002
A solution of sodium hydroxide (7.08g, 0.177mol) in water (150ml) was added to a solution of the amino alcohol of Preparation 6 (32g, 0.177mol) in dichloromethane (250ml), and the mixture was cooled to 0°C. A solution of chloroacetyl chloride (14.3ml, 0.177mol) in dichloromethane (50ml) was added dropwise over 30 minutes, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The phases were separated, and the organic layer was washed with sodium hydroxide (2N, 150ml), 2N hydrochloric acid (150ml), and brine (50ml), then dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residual oil was dissolved in ethanol (200ml), a solution of potassium hydroxide (9.93g, 0.177mol) in ethanol (200ml) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture was filtered, the filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure, and the residue was triturated with diethyl ether/pentane to afford the title compound as a white powder, 26g. 1H- NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.20 (t, 2H), 3.78 (m, 5H), 4.19 (s, 2H), 4.54 (s, 2H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.18 (d, 2H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 244 [MNa*].
Preparation 12 (6f7)-4-(4-Methoxybenzvh-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
CH,
Figure imgf000065_0001
The title compound was obtained in 76% yield from the alcohol of Preparation 7 and chloroacetyl chloride, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 11 , except, the compound was additionally purified by column chromatography on silica gel using dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2) as eluant. 1H- NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.18 (d, 3H), 2.99-3.14 (m, 2H), 3.79 (m, 4H), 4.17 (d, 1H), 4.25 (d, 1 H), 4.38 (d, 1 H), 4.61 (d, 1 H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.17 (d, 2H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 258 [MNa+]
Preparation 13 (6S)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000065_0002
The title compound was obtained as a yellow oil in 61% yield from the amino alcohol of Preparation 8, following the procedure described in Preparation 11. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.18 (d, 3H), 2.98-3.10 (m, 2H), 3.78 (m, 4H), 4.18 (d, 1 H), 4.25 (d, 1 H), 4.38 (d, 1 H), 4.60 (d, 1 H), 6.61 (d, 2H), 7.17 (d, 2H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 258 [MNa÷]
Preparation 14
(5S)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-5-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000066_0001
A solution of chloroacetyl chloride (2.34ml, 29mmol) in dichloromethane (25ml) was added dropwise over 10 minutes to a stirred ice-cooled mixture of the amino alcohol of Preparation 10 (5.6g, 287mmol) in sodium hydroxide solution (1.16g, 29mmol in water (20ml)) and dichloromethane (50ml). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours, and then the layers were separated. The organic phase was washed with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution (25ml), 2M hydrochloric acid (20ml) and brine (20ml), then dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in ethanol (40ml) the solution was cooled in an ice-bath, and a solution of potassium hydroxide (1.63g, 29mmol) in ethanol (40ml) was added dropwise over 5 minutes. The mixture was then allowed to warm to room temperature and was stirred for a further 18 hours. The resulting precipitate was filtered off, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (150ml). This solution was dried (MgS0 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (97:3:0.3 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound, 4g. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.26 (d, 3H), 3.37 (m, 1 H), 3.62 (dd, 1 H), 3.70 (dd, 1H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.90 (d, 1 H), 4.20 (d, 1 H), 4.24 (d, 1H), 5.33 (d, 1H), 6.83 (d, 2H), 7.19 (d, 2H). [α]D = -109.66 (c = 0.139, methanol) Preparation 15 (5f7)-4-(4-Methoxybenzvh-5-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000067_0001
The title compound was obtained in 49% yield from the alcohol of Preparation 9 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 14. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.24 (d, 3H), 3.30 (m, 1 H), 3.60 (dd, 1 H), 3.70 (dd, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.85 (d, 1 H), 4.18 (d, 1 H), 4.22 (d, 1 H), 5.28 (d, 1 H), 6.81 (d, 2H), 7.18 (d, 2H).
Preparation 16 4-Methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000067_0002
A solution of chloroacetyl chloride (3.81 ml, 50mmol) in dichloromethane (100ml) was added dropwise over 30 minutes to a suspension of 2-(methylamino)ethanol (4ml, 50mmol) and sodium hydroxide (2g, 50mmol) in dichloromethane (50ml) and water (50ml), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 hours then evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in ethanol (100ml), potassium hydroxide (2.8g, 50mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours then filtered, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of pentane:ethyl acetate (100:0 to 50:δ0 to 0:100), to afford the title compound, 3.42g. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 2.98 (s, 3H), 3.34 (t, 2H), 3.84 (t, 2H), 4.14 (s, 2H). Found: C, δl .δδ; H, 8.02; N, 12.01. C5H92;0.1 H2θ requires C, δ1.36; H, 7.93; N, 11.98%. Preparation 17 tert-Butyl f2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy1acetate
Figure imgf000068_0001
N,N-Dimethylethanolamine (5.02ml, 50mmol) was added dropwise over 5 minutes to an ice-cooled suspension of sodium hydride (2.2g, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, δδmmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100ml), and the solution was stirred for 30 minutes. tert-Butyl bromoacetate (7.38ml, δOmmol) was added dropwise over δ minutes, then the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for a further 18 hours. The mixture was pre-adsorbed onto silica gel, and purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of pentane:ethyl acetate:methanol (60:60:0 to 0:100:0 to 0:80:20) to afford the title compound as a yellow oil, 1.46g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.60 (s, 9H), 2.30 (s, 6H), 2.δ9 (t, 2H), 3.64 (t, 2H) 4.00 (s, 2H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 204 [MH4]
Preparation 18 tert-Butyl (3r7)-3-(2-tert-butoxy-2-oxoethoxy)pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate
Figure imgf000068_0002
Sodium hydride (704mg, 60% in mineral oil, 17.6mmol) was added to an ice-cooled solution of tert-butyl (3r7)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (J. Med. Chem. 1998, 41(25), 4983) (δg, 267mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100ml), and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 20 minutes. tert-Butyl bromoacetate (δ.2g, 267mmol) was added and the mixture was heated under reflux for 18 hours, then cooled and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and water and the phases separated. The organic layer was dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:pentane (0:100 to 20:80) to afford the title compound, 1.9δg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.42 (s, 9H), 1.44 (s, 9H), 1.86-2.05 (m, 2H), 3.40 (m, 4H), 3.94 (m, 2H), 4.10 (m, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 324 [MNa*]
Preparation 19 Ethyl 3-cvclohexyl-3-methylbutanoate
Figure imgf000069_0001
Trimethylsilyl chloride (1.3ml, 10.2mmol), copper (I) chloride (30mg, 0.3mmol) and cyclohexylmagnesium chloride (4.6ml, 2N in diethyl ether, 9.2mmol) were added slowly to an ice-cooled solution of ethyl 3,3-dimethylacrylate (1g, δ.δmmol) in 0 tetrahydrofuran (10ml). The solution was stirred for 10 minutes, then allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for an hour. Saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution (10ml) was added and the mixture was partitioned between water (10ml) and diethyl ether (20ml). The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with diethyl ether (2x10ml). The combined organic extracts were δ dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate:pentane(δ:9δ) as eluant to afford the title compound, 1.2g. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.76 (m, 8H), 1.06-1.28 (m, 7H), 1.62 (m, 1 H), 178 (m, 4H), 2.20 (s, 2H), 4.10 (q, 2H).
0 Preparation 20
3-Cvclohexyl-3-methyl-1 -butanol
Figure imgf000069_0002
Lithium borohydride (1.23g, δ6.6mmol) was added to a solution of the ester of Preparation 19 (4g, 18.9mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (30ml), and the mixture was stirred 6 at 60°C for 18 hours. Aqueous ammonium chloride solution (15ml) was added carefully to the cooled solution, and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3x30ml). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate:pentane (20:80) as eluant to afford the title compound, 1g. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.80 (s, 6H), 0.88-1.18 (m, 6H), 1.60 (t, 2H), 1.60 (m, 1 H), 170 (m, 4H), 3.64 (m, 2H).
Preparation 21 (3-Bromo-1.1 -dimethylpropyDcvclohexane
Figure imgf000070_0001
Triphenylphosphine (1.8g, 7.1 mmol) was added portionwise to an ice-cooled solution of the alcohol of Preparation 20 (1g, 5.9mmol) and carbon tetrabromide (2.9g, 8.8mmol) in dichloromethane (15ml), and once addition was complete, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 hours. The solution was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was suspended in a mixture of pentane:ethyl acetate (δ:1 , by volume). The resulting precipitate was filtered off through a pad of silica gel and washed with pentane:ethyl acetate (δ:1 , by volume, 300ml). The combined filtrates were concentrated under reduced pressure, and the product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using pentane as eluant to afford the title compound, 1.1g. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.80 (2xs, 6H), 0.90-1.20 (m, 6H), 1.62 (m, 3H), 17δ (m, 2H), 1.81 (m, 2H), 3.36 (m, 2H).
Preparation 22
4-(2-Bromoethyl)-1.1 -dimethylcvclohexane
Figure imgf000070_0002
A mixture of 2-(4,4-dimethylcyclohexyl)ethanol (W099/69971) (2g, 12.8mmol), concentrated sulphuric acid (7δ0μl) and 48% hydrobromic acid (3ml) was stirred at 90°C for 7 hours. The cooled mixture was then carefully quenched by the addition of water (2δml), and the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (3x30ml). The combined organic extracts were washed with 2M sodium carbonate solution and brine (30ml), then dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residual black gum was purified by distillation to afford the title compound, 330mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.82 (2xs, 6H), 1.02-1.20 (m, 4H), 1.3δ (m, 3H), 1.50 (m, 2H), 178 (m, 2H), 3.40 (t, 2H).
Preparation 23 2-rHvdroxyM-propyl-1 --imidazol-4-vπmethyl1-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000071_0001
A solution of the compound of Preparation 11 (13g, 587mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100ml) was added dropwise to a solution of lithium diisopropylamide (35.3ml, 2M in tetrahydrofuran/heptane/ethylbenzene, 70.5mmol) at -78°C, and the solution was 0 stirred at -78°C for 20 minutes. The aldehyde of Preparation 1 (97δg, 70.δmmol) was added dropwise and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature, then stirred for 1.6 hours. Ammonium chloride solution (100ml) was added and the mixture was diluted with water (100ml) and tetrahydrofuran (300ml). The layers were separated, the aqueous phase was extracted with tetrahydrofuran (260ml), and δ the combined organic solutions were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0:0 to 0:96:6:0.6) to afford the title compound, 14g. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 0.90 (t, 3H), 1.76 (m, 2H), 3.00 (m, 1 H), 0 3.32-3.43 (m, 1 H), 3.61 -3.81 (m, 6H), 3.98 (m, 1 H), 4.42-4.68 (m, 3H), 4.76 (m, 0.5H), 5.03 (m, 0.5H), 6.81 (m, 3H), 7.15 (m, 2H), 7.38 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 360.0 [MH+]
Preparation 24 5 2-fHvdroxy(1-propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-vhmethvn-4-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000071_0002
Lithium diisopropylamide (17.4ml, 2M in heptane/tetrahydrofuran/ethylbenzene, 34.8mmol) was added over 10 minutes to a cooled (-78°C) solution of the compound of Preparation 10 (3.42g, 29mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100ml), and the resulting solution was stirred for 20 minutes. The aldehyde of Preparation 1 (4.81 g, 34.8mmol) was added and the mixture was allowed to warm slowly to room temperature, then stirred for 18 hours. Aqueous ammonium chloride solution (20ml) was added, and the mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of pentane:ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (50:50:0:0 to 0:100:0:0 to 0:90:5:5) to afford the title compound as a yellow gum, 5.47g. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 0.90 (t, 3H), 1.78 (m, 2H), 2.98 (2xs, 3H), 3.10 (m, 1 H), 3.57 (m, 2H), 3.80 (m, 3H), 3.98-4.08 (m, 1 H), 4.39, 4.49, 4.86, 4.98, 5.22 (5xm, 2H), 6.88 (s, 1 H), 7.38 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 254.2 [MH+]
Preparation 25 2-f(1-Butyl-1 --imidazol-4-vπ(hvdroxy)methyll-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000072_0001
A solution of the compound of Preparation 11 (3.63g, 16.4mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (40ml) was added dropwise over 5 minutes to a solution of lithium diisopropylamide (9.8ml, 2M in tetrahydrofuran/heptane/ethylbenzene, 19.7mmol) at -78°C, and the solution was stirred at -78°C for 30 minutes. The aldehyde of Preparation 2 (3.0g, 197mmol) was added dropwise and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature, then stirred for 18 hours. The mixture was partitioned between ammonium chloride solution and ethyl acetate (300ml). The layers were separated, and the organic solution was dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:methanol: (100:0 to 90:10) to afford the title compound, 4.35g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 0.96 (t, 3H), 1.35 (m, 2H), 1.78 (m, 2H), 3.03 (m, 1 H), 3.42 (m, 1 H), 3.66-3.80 (m, 5H), 3.87 (m, 2H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.50 (m, 0.5H), 4.57 (m, 2.5H), 4.83 (m, 0.5H), 5.06 (m, 0.5H), 6.90 (m, 3H), 7.20 (m, 2H), 7.41 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 374.0 [MH+] Preparation 26 2-rri-(2-Cvclohexylethvπ-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmvdroxy)methvn-4-(4-methoxybenzvh-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000073_0001
The title compound was obtained as a sticky gum in 66% yield from the compound of Preparation 11 and the aldehyde of Preparation 3, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 25. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 0.98 (m, 2H), 1.22 (m, 4H), 1.58-178 (m, 7H), 3.03 (m, 1 H), 3.38-3.50 (m, 1H), 370-3.82 (m, 4H), 3.90 (m, 2H), 4.01 (m, 1 H), 4.50 (d, 0.5H), 4.58 (m, 2.5H), 4.87 (m, 0.5H), 5.08 (m, 0.5H), 6.82-6.95 (m, 3H), 7.19 (m, 2H), 7.41 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 428.1 [MH+]
Preparation 27 2-(Hvdroxy[1-(2-phenylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyl)-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000073_0002
The title compound was obtained in 54% yield from the compound of Preparation 11 and the aldehyde of Preparation 4, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 25, except pentane:ethyl acetate:methanol (50:50:0 to 0:100:0 to 0:87:13) was used as the elution gradient. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 3.02 (m, 3H), 3.42 (m, 1 H), 3.74 (m, 4H), 3.95-4.05 (m, 1 H), 4.12 (m, 2H), 4.45 (m, 0.5H), 4.58 (m, 2.5H), 4.81 (m, 0.5H), 5.06 (d, 0.5H), 6.84 (m, 3H), 7.07 (d, 2H), 7.19 (m, 2H), 7.27 (m, 4H). LRMS: m z (ES+) 422 [MH4] Preparation 28 2-rHvdroxy(1-trityl-1 H-imidazol-4-vπmethyl1-4- 4-methoxybenzvπ-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000074_0001
A solution of lithium diisopropylamide (88.5ml, 1.5M in cyclohexane, 133mmol) and tetrahydrofuran (100ml) was cooled to -78°C. A solution of the compound of
Preparation 11 (26g, 118mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100ml) was added dropwise, and the solution was stirred for 30 minutes. A solution of the imidazole of Preparation 5 (39.9g, 118mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (350ml) was added dropwise over 1 hour, and once addition was complete, the reaction was allowed to warm slowly to room temperature with stirring, over 3 hours. Saturated ammonium chloride solution (200ml) and water (100ml) were added, the phases were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (100ml). The combined organic solutions were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residual orange oil was dissolved in ethyl acetate/methanol, the solution was sonicated, and the resulting white precipitate was filtered off, washed with diethyl ether and dried, to give the title compound, 21 g. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate: methanol (96:4) as eluant to afford additional product, 28g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 2.98 (m, 1 H), 3.35 (m, 1 H), 3.66 (m, 1 H), 3.73 (s, 3H), 3.96 (m, 1 H), 4.40 (d, 1 H), 4.54 (s, 1 H), 4.60 (d, 1 H), 5.21 (m, 1 H), 679 (m, 3H), 7.08 (m, 6H), 7.15 (m, 2H), 7.26 (m, 9H), 7.37 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 560.2 [MH+] Preparation 29 r6ffl-2-rHvdroxyn-trityl-1 H-imidazol-4-vnmethyll-4-(4-methoxybenzvn-6-methyl-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000075_0001
The title compound was obtained in 62% yield from the morpholinone of Preparation 12 and the imidazole of Preparation 5, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 28. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 1.00, 1.06 (2xm, 3H), 2.87-3.04 (m, 2H), 3.76 (m, 3H), 3.80-474 (m, 4H), 4.98-5.21 (m, 1 H), 6.78 (m, 3H), 7.05-7.20 (m, 8H), 7.23-7.40 (m, 10H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 574 [MH+]
Preparation 30 (6S)-2-rHvdroxy(1-trityl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyll-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000075_0002
The title compound was obtained as a yellow foam in 53% yield from the morpholinone of Preparation 13 and the imidazole of Preparation 5, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 28. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz)
(mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 1.00, 1.05 (2xm, 3H), 2.85-3.04 (m, 2H), 3.76 (m, 3H), 3.80-3.96 (m, 1 H), 4.39-470 (m, 3H), 4.98-5.20 (m, 1 H), 6.78 (m, 3H), 7.05-
7.20 (m, 8H), 7.25 (m, 9H), 7.39 (m, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 574 [MH+] Preparation 31 (5 Sϊ-2-rHvd roxy( 1 -trityl- 1 H-i midazol-4-vπ methvM-4-(4-methoxybenzvO-5-meth yl-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000076_0001
The title compound was obtained in 57% yield from the morpholinone of Preparation 14 and the imidazole of Preparation 5, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 28. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 1.03- 1.19 (m, 3H), 2.99-4.83 (m, 8H), 5.02-5.38 (m, 2H), 678-6.88 (m, 3H), 7.10-7.21 (m, 8H), 7.22-7.42 (m, 10H).
Preparation 32 (5 ?)-2-fHvdroxy(1-trityl-1 /--imidazol-4-yl)methvn-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-methyl-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000076_0002
The title compound was obtained as a yellow foam in 80% yield from the morpholinone of Preparation 15 and the imidazole of Preparation 5, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 28. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 1.00-1.16 (m, 3H), 3.16-4.94 (m, 8H), 5.00-5.37 (m, 2H), 672-6.83 (m, 3H), 7.04-7.19 (m, 8H), 7.21-7.40 (m, 10H). Preparation 33 tert-Butyl 2-r2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy1-3-hvdroxy-3-(1 -propyl-1 H-imidazol-4- vDpropanoate
Figure imgf000077_0001
Lithium diisopropylamide (4.3ml, 2M in heptane/tetrahydrofuran/ethylbenzene, 8.6mmol) was added dropwise over 5 minutes to a solution of the amine of Preparation 17 (1.46g, 7.2mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (20ml) and the solution was stirred at -78°C for 20 minutes. The aldehyde of Preparation 1 (1.18g, 8.6mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for 3 hours then allowed to warm to -20°C. Water was added, and the mixture pre-adsorbed onto silica gel. The product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (100:0:0 to 96:2:2) to afford the title compound, 1.36g. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 0.88 (m, 3H), 1 .35 (2xs, 9H), 1.75 (m, 2H), 2.22 (s, 6H), 2.42 (m, 1 H), 2.58 (m, 1 H), 3.55 (m, 1 H), 3.80 (m, 2H), 3.90 (m, 1 H), 4.17 (m, 1 H), 4.82, 5.00 (m, 1 H), 6.90 (2xs, 1 H), 7.35 (2xs, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 342.2 [MH+]
Preparation 34 tert-Butyl (3S)-3-(1 -tert-butoxycarbonyl-2-hvdroxy-2-(1 -propyl-1 rY-imidazol-4-yl)- ethoxy)pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate
Figure imgf000077_0002
A solution of the compound of Preparation 18 (5.67g, 18.8mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (20ml) was added dropwise to a solution of lithium diisopropylamide (11.3ml, 2M in heptane/tetrahydrofuran/ethylbenzene, 22.6mmol) at -78°C, and the solution was stirred at -78°C for 20 minutes. The aldehyde of Preparation 1 (3.12g, 22.6mmol) was added portionwise, and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature then stirred for 18 hours. Ammonium chloride solution (50ml) was added carefully and the mixture was extracted with tetrahydrofuran (2x200ml). The combined organic solutions were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residual orange oil was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0: to 90:10:1) to afford the title compound, 37g. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 0.92 (t, 3H), 1.42 (s, 18H), 1.79 (m, 2H), 1.94-2.14 (m, 1 H), 275-3.50 (m, 5H), 3.84 (m, 2H), 4.03-4.35 (m, 2H), 4.81-5.08 (m, 2H), 6.88 (m, 1H), 7.39 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 440 [MH+]
Preparation 35
(2EZ)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-2-f(1-propyl-1 /-/-imidazol-4-yl)methylidene1-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000078_0001
Triethylamine (9.19ml, 65.9mmol) was added to a solution of the alcohol of Preparation 23 (15.8g, 44.0mmol) in dichloromethane (300ml). The solution was cooled in ice, methanesulphonyl chloride (5.1ml, 65.9mmol) was added, and the solution was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. Additional triethylamine (3.06ml, 22mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours then cooled. The mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (1000ml) and washed with sodium bicarbonate solution (200ml). The aqueous wash was extracted with dichloromethane (400ml), and the combined organic solutions were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0:0 to 0:95:5:0.5 to 0:90:10:1) to afford the title compound, 8.3g. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 0.90 (t, 3H), 1.78 (m, 2H), 3.39 (t, 2H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 3.83 (t, 2H), 4.15 (t, 2H), 4.61 (s, 2H), 6.81 (d, 2H), 7.00 (s, 1 H), 7.19 (d, 2H), 7.28 (s, 1 H), 7.41 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 342 [MHl
Preparation 36
( £Z)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-2-[(1-trityl-1 -/-imidazol-4-yl)methylidene1-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000079_0001
The title compound was obtained in 77% yield as a yellow foam from the alcohol of Preparation 28 following the procedure described in Preparation 35. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 3.34 (t, 2H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 4.00 (t, 2H), 4.59 (s, 2H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 6.98 (s, 1 H), 7.10 (m, 6H), 7.17 (d, 2H), 7.28 (m, 10H), 7.39 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 542 [MH+]
Preparation 37 (2EZ.6 ?)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-2-r(1-trityl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methylidene1-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000079_0002
The title compound was obtained in 57% yield as a pale yellow foam, from the alcohol of Preparation 29, following the procedure described in Preparation 35. 1H- NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 1.02 (d, 3H), 3.08 (dd, 1 H), 3.20 (dd, 1 H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 4.10 (m, 1 H), 4.50 (d, 1 H), 4.60 (d, 1 H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 6.99 (s, 1 H), 7.14 (m, 8H), 7.28 (m, 10H), 7.38 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 556 [MH+] Preparation 38 (2EZ.6S)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-2-f(1-trityl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methylidene1-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000080_0001
Methanesulphonyl chloride (911μl, 1178mmol) was added dropwise to an ice-cooled solution of the alcohol of Preparation 30 (4.5g, 7.85mmol) in dichloromethane (40ml) and triethylamine (1.64ml, 1178mmol), and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Additional triethylamine (546μl, 3.93mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane (50ml) and water (50ml) and the layers were separated. The organic phase was dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residual orange oil was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 98:2:0.2) to afford the title compound as a yellow foam, 2.5g. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 1.02 (d, 3H), 3.05 (m, 1 H), 3.20 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 4.06 (m, 1H), 4.47-4.63 (m, 2H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 6.98 (s, 1H), 7.12 (m, 8H), 7.27 (m, 10H), 7.38 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 556 [MH+]
Preparation 39 (2EZ.5S)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-5-methyl-2-r(1-trityl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methylidene1-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000080_0002
The title compound was obtained in 28% yield from the alcohol of Preparation 31 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 38. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 1.22 (d, 3H), 3.38 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.81 (d, 1 H), 3.95 (m, 2H), 5.28 (d, 1 H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 6.95 (s, 1 H), 7.10-7.19 (m, 9H), 7.28 (m, 9H), 7.40 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 40 (.?EZ.5r?)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-5-methyl-2-r(1-trityl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methylidenel-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000081_0001
The title compound was obtained in 27% yield from the alcohol of Preparation 32 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 38. 1 H-NMR (CDC ,
400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 1.25 (d, 3H), 3.41 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H),
3.83 (dd, 1 H), 3.98 (m, 2H), 5.30 (d, 1 H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 6.98 (s, 1 H), 7.18 (m, 9H), 7.32 (m, 9H), 7.41 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 41 (■?EZ)-2-r(1-Butyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methylidene1-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000081_0002
Triethylamine (178ml, 12.8mmol) was added to a solution of the alcohol of
Preparation 25 (4.34g, 11.6mmol) in dichloromethane (50ml). The solution was cooled in ice and methanesulphonyl chloride (990μl, 12.8mmol) was added. The solution was stirred for 30 minutes, additional triethylamine (1.78ml, 12.8mmol) added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:ethyl acetate:methanol (100:0:0 to 0:90:10) to afford the title compound as a sticky gum, 1.12g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 0.95 (t, 3H), 1.34 (m, 2H), 178 (m, 2H), 3.42 (t, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.94 (t, 2H), 4.19 (t, 2H), 4.63 (s, 2H), 6.84 (d, 2H), 7.02 (s, 1 H), 7.22 (d, 2H), 7.32 (s, 1 H), 7.44 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 356.2 [MH+]
Preparation 42 (2EZ)-2-(ri-(2-Cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethylidene)-4-(4-methoxybenzvh-
3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000082_0001
The title compound was obtained as a sticky gum in 57% yield from the alcohol of Preparation 26 following the procedure described in Preparation 41. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 0.94 (m, 2H), 1.18 (m, 4H), 1.64 (m, 7H), 3.40 (t, 2H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.90 (t, 2H), 4.17 (t, 2H), 4.61 (s, 2H), 6.81 (d, 2H), 6.99 (s, 1H), 7.20 (d, 2H), 7.25 (s, 1 H), 7.40 (s, 1H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 410.1 [MH+]
Preparation 43 (2EZ)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-2-(π-(2-phenylethvh-1 H-imidazol-4-vnmethylidene)-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000082_0002
Triethylamine (0.98ml, 7.03mmol) was added to a solution of the alcohol of Preparation 27 (1.41 g, 3.35mmol) in dichloromethane (15ml). The solution was cooled in ice, methanesulphonyl chloride (311μl, 4.02mmol) was added, and the mixture was warmed to 40°C and stirred for 18 hours, then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of pentane:ethyl acetate: methanol (75:25:0 to 0:100:0 to 0:95:5) to afford the title compound as an orange oil, 449mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 3.03 (t, 2H), 3.42 (t, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 4.18 (m, 4H), 4.63 (s, 2H), 6.85 (d, 2H), 7.02 (s, 1 H), 7.06 (d, 2H), 7.25 (m, 7H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 404 [MH+]
Preparation 44 tert-Butyl (2EZ)-2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy1-3-(1 -propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)-2- propenoate
Figure imgf000083_0001
Methanesulphonyl chloride (340μl, 4.4mmol) was added dropwise to an ice-cooled solution of the alcohol of Preparation 33 (1.36g, 4.0mmol) and triethylamine (616μl, 4.4mmol) in dichloromethane (20ml). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, additional triethylamine (616μl, 4.4mmol) was added, and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so the solution was heated to reflux and stirred for a further 3 hours. The cooled mixture was pre-adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:diethylamine:methanol (100:0:0 to 96:2:2) to afford the title compound, 650mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 0.98 (t, 3H), 1.56 (s, 9H), 1.84 (m, 2H), 2.34 (s, 6H), 2.65 (t, 2H), 3.94 (t, 2H), 4.04 (t, 2H), 7.08 (s, 1 H), 7.44 (s, 1 H), 7.98 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 324.2 [MH+] Preparation 45 tert-Butyl (3S)-3-{\(EZ-l -(tert-butoxycarbonvh-2-(1 -propyl-1 H-imidazol-4- yl)ethenylloxy)pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate
Figure imgf000084_0001
The title compound was obtained as an orange oil in 36% yield from the alcohol of Preparation 34 following the procedure described in Preparation 44. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 0.93 (t, 3H), 1.35-1.56 (m, 18H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 1.98 (m, 1 H), 2.17 (m, 1 H), 3.26-3.66 (m, 4H), 3.86 (m, 2H), 5.15 (m, 1 H), 7.06, 7.15 (2xs, 1 H), 7.35, 7.39 (2xs, 1 H), 7.41 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 422 [MH+]
Preparation 46 (2EZ)-4-Methyl-2-[(1-propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methylidenel-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000084_0002
Triethylamine (3.32ml, 23.8mmol) was added to a solution of the alcohol of
Preparation 24 (5.47g, 21.6mmol) in dichloromethane (80ml), and the solution was cooled in ice. A solution of methanesulphonyl chloride (1.84ml, 23.8mmol) in dichloromethane (3ml) was added over 5 minutes, and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure, the residue was dissolved in N,N-dimethylformamide (15ml), triethylamine (3.32ml, 23.8mmol) was added, and the solution was heated at reflux and stirred for 20 minutes. The cooled solution was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in methanol (100ml) then adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (100:0:0 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound, 2.5g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 0.98 (t, 3H), 1.82 (m, 2H), 3.14 (s, 3H), 3.59 (t, 2H), 3.90 (t, 2H), 4.26 (t, 2H), 7.00 (s, 1 H), 7.35 (s, 1 H), 7.45 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 236.2 [MH+]
Preparation 47 -(2S)-4-(4-Methoxybenzvπ-2-[(1-propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl1-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000085_0001
A mixture of the alkene of Preparation 35 (8.3g, 24.3mmol) and 10% Pd/C (Degussa® 101) (800mg) in ethanol (240ml) was hydrogenated at 10Opsi (690kPa) and 50°C for 18 hours, then cooled and filtered through Arbocel®. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure to give an orange oil. This product was purified by column chromatography on a Chiralcel® OJ column, using hexane: isopropyl alcoho diethylamine (70:30:0.5) as eluant, to afford enantiomer 1 , 1.65g, followed by enantiomer 2, the title compound, 1.54g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.92 (t, 3H), 178 (m, 2H), 3.07 (m, 2H), 3.38 (m, 2H), 3.74 (m, 1 H), 3.79 (m, 5H), 3.98 (m, 1 H), 4.52 (m, 3H), 6.72 (s, 1 H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.18 (d, 2H), 7.38 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 344 [MH4]. [α]D = -66.10, (c = 0.368, methanol)
Preparation 48 (2RS)-2-f(1-Butyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methvn-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000085_0002
A mixture of the alkene of Preparation 41 (2.5g, 6.96mmol) and 10% Pd/C (Degussa® 101) (250mg) in ethanol (100ml) was hydrogenated at 50°C and 60 psi (41 OkPa) for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was filtered through Arbocel® and the filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the title compound as an oil, 2.44g. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.95 (t, 3H), 1.32 (m, 2H), 173 (m, 2H), 3.04 (m, 2H), 3.34-3.42 (m, 2H), 3.73 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.82 (t, 2H), 3.98 (m, 1 H), 4.45-4.60 (m, 3H), 6.74 (s, 1 H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.18 (d, 2H), 7.38 (s, 1H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 358.2 [MHl
Preparations 49 to 50 The compounds of the following general formula
Figure imgf000086_0001
were prepared from the appropriate alkene (Preparations 42 and 43), following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 48.
Figure imgf000086_0002
1 = purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate: methanol (100:0 to 90:10) Preparation 51 (2RS)-4-Methyl-2-r(1-propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-vπmethvn-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000087_0001
A mixture of the alkene of Preparation 46 (2.5g, 1.Oδmmol) and 10% Pd/C (Degussa® 101) (250mg) in ethanol (50ml) was hydrogenated at 50°C and 60 psi (41 OkPa) for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was filtered through Arbocel® and the filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (100:0:0 to 96.5:175:175) to afford the title compound as a colourless oil, 2.08g. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.95 (t, 3H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 3.00 (m, 4H), 3.18 (m, 1 H), 3.37 (m, 1 H), 3.57 (m, 1 H), 3.82 (m, 3H), 4.03 (m, 1 H), 4.46 (dd, 1 H), 6.78 (s, 1 H), 7.39 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 238 [MH+]
Preparation 52 (2RS)-2-[(1 H-lmidazol-4-yl)methvn-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000087_0002
A mixture of the protected imidazole of Preparation 36 (25g, 46mmol) and Pd/C Degussa® 101 catalyst (2.5g) in ethanol (500ml) was hydrogenated at 50°C and 60 psi (410kPa) for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so the mixture was filtered through Arbocel® and the filtrate was hydrogenated using fresh catalyst (2.5g) in ethanol (500ml) at 50°C and 60 psi (410kPa) for a further 18 hours. The mixture was filtered through Arbocel® and the filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure. The product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound as a white foam, 9g. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.01 (m, 1 H), 3.18 (m, 2H), 3.38 (m, 1 H), 3.70 (dd, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.97 (dd, 1 H), 4.32 (m, 1 H), 4.50 (dd, 2H), 6.81 (d, 2H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 7.02 (d, 2H), 7.46 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 302 [MH+]
Preparation 53 -(2S)-2-r(1 H-lmidazol-4-yl)methyll-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone and
Preparation 54 (+)-(2R)-2-r(1 H-lmidazol-4-yl)methyll-4-(4-methoxybenzvh-3-morpholinone
The racemic compound of Preparation 52 was further purified by HPLC using a Chiralpak® OD column, and hexane:isopropyl alcohol (80:20) as eluant to afford the title compound of preparation 53, >99%ee. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.01 (m, 1 H), 3.18 (m, 2H), 3.38 (m, 1 H), 3.70 (dd, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.97 (dd, 1 H), 4.32 (m, 1 H), 4.50 (dd, 2H), 6.81 (d, 2H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 7.02 (d, 2H), 7.46 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 324 [MNa4]. [α]D = -529.3 (c = 0.05, methanol). Further elution gave the title compound of preparation 54, >99%ee. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.01 (m, 1 H), 3.18 (m, 2H), 3.38 (m, 1 H), 3.66-379 (m, 4H), 3.97 (dd, 1 H), 4.32 (t, 1 H), 4.50 (dd, 2H), 6.81 (d, 2H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 7.02 (d, 2H), 7.46 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 324 [MNa÷]
Preparation 55a (2S.6 ?)-2-f(1 H-lmidazol-4-yl)methvn-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone and
Preparation 55b (2f?.6 ?)-2-r(1 H-lmidazol-4-yl)methyl1-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000088_0001
A mixture of the alkene of Preparation 154 (41 g, 131 mmol) and 10% palladium on carbon (Degussa type 101) (8g) in ethanol (500ml) was hydrogenated at 50 psi (345kPa) and 60°C for 24 hours. The mixture was filtered through Arbocel®, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was azeotroped with dichloromethane. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using a Biotage column, eluting with a solvent gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (97.5:2.5:0.1 to 90:10:1). The higher running, major product was repurified by column chromatography on silica gel using dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (95:5:0.25) to afford the title compound of preparation 55a as a white foam. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.19 (d, 3H), 2.97- 3.22 (m, 4H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.84 (m, 1 H), 4.32 (t, 1 H), 4.40 (d, 1 H), 4.50 (d, 1 H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 6.86 (s, 1H), 7.00 (d, 2H), 7.46 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES') 314 [M-H]" The lower running, minor product was further purified by column chromatography on silica gel using ether:methanol:0.88 ammonia (90:10:1) as eluant and the product was azeotroped with dichloromethane to afford the title compound of preparation 55b as a white foam, 220mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.19 (d, 3H), 2.97-3.22 (m, 4H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.84 (m, 1 H), 4.32 (t, 1 H), 4.40 (d, 1 H), 4.50 (d, 1 H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 7.00 (d, 2H), 7.46 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 56 ( fl.6S)-2-[(1 r -lmidazol-4-yl)methyl1-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000089_0001
The title compound was obtained in 20% yield from the protected alkene of Preparation 38 following the procedure described in 52. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.19 (d, 3H), 2.99 (m, 2H), 3.17 (m, 2H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.83 (m, 1 H), 4.30 (m, 1 H), 4.44 (dd, 2H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 6.85 (s, 1 H), 7.00 (d, 2H), 7.45 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 316 [MH]+
Preparation 57
(2S.5S)-2-f(1 H-lmidazol-4-yl)methvn-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000089_0002
The title compound was obtained in 47% yield from the protected alkene of Preparation 39 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 52. 1H- NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (-3:1 mixture of depicted C-2 stereoisomer) δ: 1.15 (d, 3H), 3.22 (m, 3H), 3.48, 370-4.00 (2xm, 6H), 4.38 (m, 1 H), 5.18-5.37 (m, 1H), 6.83 (d, 2H), 6.98 (m, 1 H), 7.18 (d, 2H), 7.62 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES') 314 [M-H"]
Preparation 58 (2R.5ffl-2-r(1 H-lmidazol-4-vπmethyll-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000090_0001
The title compound was obtained in 67% yield from the protected imidazole of
Preparation 40 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 52. 1H- NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (-3:1 mixture of depicted C-2 stereoisomer) δ: 1.16 (d, 3H), 3.22 (m, 3H), 3.46, 370-3.98 (2xm, 6H), 4.35, 4.39 (2xm, 1 H), 5.20, 5.30 (2xd, 1 H), 6.82, 6.94 (2xm, 3H), 7.18 (d, 2H), 7.53 (2xs, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES") 314 [M-H"]
Preparation 59 (2RS)-((1-r2-(4-Bromophenvπethyll-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl)-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000090_0002
Sodium hydride (836mg, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 20.9mmol) was added portionwise to an ice-cooled solution of the imidazole of Preparation 52 (5g, 19.9mol) in tetrahydrofuran (100ml), and the solution was stirred for 15 minutes. 4- Bromophenylethyl methanesulphonate (Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1996; 4(5); 645) (6.1g, 21.9mmol) was then added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 days. The reaction was quenched with water (50ml), and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (2x100ml). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound, 4.4g. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 2.97 (t, 2H), 3.04 (m, 2H), 3.36 (m, 2H), 3.70 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.97 (m, 1 H), 4.03 (t, 2H), 4.45 (m, 1 H), 4.54 (dd, 2H), 6.62 (s, 1 H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 6.90 (d, 2H), 7.18 (d, 2H), 7.20 (s, 1 H), 7.39 (d, 2H).
Preparation 60 (-)-(2S)-2-([1-(2-Cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vnmethyll-4-(4-methoxybenzv -3-
Figure imgf000091_0001
A mixture of the compound of Preparation 53 (400mg, 1.32mmol), cesium carbonate
(472mg, 1.45mmol), and 2-cyclohexylethyl bromide (227μl, 1.45mmol) in N,N- dimethylformamide (4ml) was stirred at 80°C for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (250ml) and water (100ml), and the layers were separated. The organic phase washed with water (3x100ml), dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified twice by column chromatography on silica gel using first an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0 to 95:5:0.5), then using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:diethylamine (100:0 to 95:5), to afford the title compound, as a colourless gum, 191 mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.90 (m, 2H), 1.04-1.24 (m, 4H), 1.60 (m, 7H), 3.02 (m, 2H), 3.26-3.40 (m, 2H), 3.70 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.81 (t, 2H), 3.97 (m, 1 H), 4.42-4.58 (m, 3H), 6.68 (s, 1 H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 7.14 (d, 2H), 7.35 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 412 [MH+]. [α]D = -50.37, (c = 0.112 in methanol) Preparation 61 (2/?.6S)-2-([1-(2-Cvclohexylethvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyl)-4-(4-methoxybenzvn-6- methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000092_0001
A mixture of the compound of Preparation 56 (200mg, 0.635mmol), cesium carbonate (248mg, 0762mmol) and 2-cyclohexylethyl bromide (109μl, 070mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (8ml) was stirred at 70°C for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (10ml) and water (10ml), and the layers were separated. The organic phase washed with water (2x20ml) and brine (20ml), then dried (MgSO ) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 98:2:0.2) to afford the title compound as a colourless gum, 120mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.90 (m, 2H), 1.18 (m, 7H), 1.62 (m, 7H), 2.94-3.08 (m, 3H), 3.32 (dd, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.80 (m, 3H), 4.43 (m, 3H), 6.66 (s, 1 H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 7.14 (d, 2H), 7.32 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 426 [MHl
Preparation 62 (2S.6 7)-2-(f1-f2-Cvclohexylethvh-1 ry-imidazol-4-vnmethyl)-4-(4-methoxybenzvn-6- methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000092_0002
The title compound was obtained as a colourless oil in 38% yield from the imidazole of Preparation 55 and 2-cyclohexylethyl bromide following the procedure described in Preparation 61. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.90 (m, 2H), 1.17 (m, 7H), 1.61 (m, 7H), 2.94-3.08 (m, 3H), 3.32 (dd, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.81 (m, 3H), 4.43 (m, 3H), 6.66 (s, 1H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 7.12 (d, 2H), 7.32 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 448 [MNa+] Preparation 63 f2S.5^-2-fπ-(2-Cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-4-(4-methoxybenzvπ-5- methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000093_0001
The title compound was obtained in 21% yield from the imidazole of Preparation 57 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 61 , except that ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (98:1 :1) was used as the column eluant. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of C-2 diastereoisomers) δ: 0.98 (m, 2H), 1.20 (m, 7H), 1.68 (m, 7H), 3.05-3.98 (m, 11 H), 4.50 (m, 1 H), 5.22-5.40 (m, 1 H), 6.76, 6.84 (s and m, 3H), 7.14, 7.20 (2xd, 2H), 7.39 (m, 1H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 426 [MH+]
Preparation 64 (2R.5fl)-2-f[1-(2-Cvclohexylethvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyll-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5- methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000093_0002
The title compound was obtained in 40% yield from the imidazole of Preparation 58 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 61. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of C-2 diastereoisomers) δ: 0.90 (m, 2H), 1.18 (m, 7H), 1.63 (m, 7H), 3.01-3.33 (m, 3H), 3.61 -3.90 (m, 8H), 4.42 (m, 1 H), 5.22 (m, 1 H), 6.72 (s, 1 H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 7.16 (d, 2H), 7.35 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 426 [MH Preparation 65
(2S.6f?)-2-(ri-(3-Cvclohexyl-3-methylbutvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyl)-4-(4- methoxybenzv0-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000094_0001
A mixture of the bromide of Preparation 21 (420mg, 1.8mmol), the imidazole of Preparation 55 (470mg, 1.5mmol) and cesium carbonate (586mg, 1.8mmol) in N,N- dimethylformamide (5ml) was stirred at 70°C for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and partitioned between ethyl acetate (20ml) and water (20ml) and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (3x15ml), and the combined organic solutions were washed with brine (15ml), dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography using a Biotage® silica column and toluene:diethylamine (99:1 to 85:15) as eluant to afford the title compound, 60mg. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.82 (s, 6H), 0.90-1.10 (m, 8H), 1.63 (m, 3H), 1.78 (m, 5H), 2.94-3.06 (m, 3H), 3.30 (dd, 1 H), 3.79 (m, 6H), 4.40-4.55 (m, 3H), 6.68 (s, 1 H), 6.80 (d, 2H), 7.10 (d, 2H), 7.32 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 468 [MH+]
Preparation 66
(2S.6fi)-2-((1-r2-(4.4-Dimethylcvclohexyl)ethvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl)-4-(4- methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000094_0002
The title compound was obtained in 10% yield from the bromide of Preparation 22 and the imidazole of Preparation 55 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 65. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.84 (2xs, 6H), 1.16 (m, 8H), 1.37 (m, 2H), 1.50 (m, 2H), 1.63 (m, 2H), 2.97-3.10 (m, 3H), 3.35 (dd, 1 H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.85 (m, 3H), 4.48 (m, 3H), 6.70 (s, 1 H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.16 (d, 2H), 7.35 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 454 [MH+]
Preparation 67
(2RS)-2-((1-r( EZl-3-Bromo-2-propenvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl}methvn-4-(4- methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000095_0001
Sodium hydride (133mg, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 3.32mmol) was added to an ice-cooled solution of the morpholinone of Preparation 52 (1g, 3.32mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (10ml). 1 ,3-Dibromo-1 -propene (mixture of cis and trans) (332μl, 3.32mmol) was added dropwise over 5 minutes then the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 2 hours. The mixture was partitioned between water (50ml) and ethyl acetate (50ml), and the phases were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (10ml), and the combined organic solutions were dried (Na2SO ) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2) as eluant to afford the title compound as a colourless oil, 1.1g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 3.02 (m, 2H), 3.26-3.40 (m, 2H), 3.68 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.96 (m, 1 H), 4.40 (d, 1 H), 4.42-4.55 (m, 3H), 4.60 (m, 1 H), 6.22 (m, 1 H), 6.70 (2xs, 1 H), 6.80 (m, 3H), 7.15 (m, 2H), 7.38 (2xs, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 420, 422 [MHl
Preparation 68 (2RS)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-2-r(1 -phenyl-1 --imidazol-4-yl)methvn-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000095_0002
4A Molecular sieves, copper (II) acetate (452mg, 2.49mmol) and benzeneboronic acid (405mg, 3.32mmol) were added to a solution of the imidazole of Preparation 52 (500mg, 1.66mmol) and pyridine (269μl, 3.32mmol)in dichloromethane (20ml), and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. Compressed air was then bubbled through the solution for 10 hours. The solvent was retained by using a "cold finger". The solution was then stirred under a nitrogen atmosphere for a further 18 hours. A solution of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (800mg) in saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (35ml) was added and the mixture was stirred for 20 minutes, then extracted with dichloromethane (70ml). The aqueous phase was further was extracted with dichloromethane (20ml) and the combined organic solutions were washed with water (10ml), dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residual black solid was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2 to 97:3:0.3) to afford the title compound as a pale yellow oil, 175mg. 1H- NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.02 (m, 1 H), 3.18 (m, 1 H), 3.38 (m, 2H), 370-379 (m, 4H), 3.99 (m, 1 H), 4.42 (d, 1H), 4.50 (m, 1H), 4.60 (d, 1H), 6.77 (m, 2H), 7.10 (m, 3H), 7.32 (m, 3H), 7.41 (m, 2H), 7.78 (bs, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 400 [MNa+]
Preparation 69 (2RS)-2-(ri-(2-methylphenyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyll-4-(4-Methoxybenzvn-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000096_0001
The title compound was obtained in 16% yield from the imidazole of Preparation 52 and 2-methylbenzeneboronic acid following the procedure described in Preparation 68. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 2.15 (s, 3H), 3.02 (m, 1 H), 3.18 (m, 1 H), 3.38 (m, 2H), 3.77 (m, 4H), 3.98 (m, 1 H), 4.54 (m, 3H), 6.78 (d, 2H), 6.85 (bs, 1H), 7.15 (m, 3H), 7.21 (s, 1 H), 7.25 (m, 2H), 7.45 (bs, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 470.2 [MH+] Preparation 70 (2RS)-2-iπ-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyl)-4-(4-Methoxybenzvn-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000097_0001
4A Molecular sieves (50mg), copper (II) acetate (174mg, 0.96mmol) and 3- phenoxyphenylboronic acid (J. Chem. Soc. 1970; 488) (350mg, 1.6mmol) were added to a solution of the imidazole of Preparation 52 (240mg, 0.8mmol) and pyridine (130μl, 1.6mmol) in dichloromethane (2ml). Compressed air was then bubbled through the solution, maintained at 20-25°C using a water bath, for 7 hours, and the solvent was retained by using a "cold finger". The solution was then stirred under a nitrogen atmosphere for a further 18 hours. The mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane (80ml) and a solution of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid tetrasodium salt (1g) in saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (30ml) and the phases were separated. The organic layer was dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:diethylamine (100:0 to 95:5). The product was further purified by column chromatography using a Biotage® silica gel column, and an elution gradient of toluene:diethylamine (100:0 to 88:12) to afford the title compound as a pale yellow gum, 120mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.01 (m, 1H), 3.15 (dd, 1H), 3.38 (m, 2H), 3.72 (m, 4H), 3.97 (m, 1H), 4.45 (d, 1H), 4.50 (m, 1 H), 4.58 (d, 1H), 6.77 (d, 2H), 6.90 (m, 1 H), 6.97 (m, 1H), 7.00-7.18 (m, 7H), 7.37 (m, 3H), 7.75 (s, 1 H). LRMS m/z (TSP+) 470.2 [MK*]
Preparations 71 to 73 The following compounds of general structure
Figure imgf000097_0002
were prepared from the morpholinone of Preparation 52 and the appropriate boronic acids, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 70.
Figure imgf000098_0002
Preparations 74 to 76 The following compounds of general structure
Figure imgf000098_0001
were prepared from the morpholinone of Preparation 53 and the appropriate boronic acids, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 70.
Figure imgf000099_0002
Preparations 77 to 80 The following compounds of general structure
Figure imgf000099_0001
were prepared from the morpholinone of Preparation 55 and the appropriate boronic acids, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 70.
Figure imgf000100_0001
h h lb i id (JCh S Preparation 81 r2S.6 ?)-2-(ri-(4-Cvclohexylphenyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-4-(4-methoxybenzvh-6- methyl-3-morpholinone
CH' "3
Figure imgf000101_0001
A mixture of copper (II) acetate (398mg, 2.2mmol), 4-cyclohexylbenzeneboronic acid (980mg, 4.8mmol), the imidazole of Preparation 55 (790mg, 2.4mmol) and pyridine (390μl, 4.8mmol) in dichloromethane (20ml) was stirred at room temperature while compressed air was bubbled through the solution for 8 hours, and the solvent was retained by using a "cold finger". The solution was then stirred under a nitrogen atmosphere for a further 18 hours. The mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane (200ml) and water (200ml) containing ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid tetrasodium salt (1g) and aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (35ml) and the layers were separated. The organic phase was dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography using a Biotage® silica gel column and an elution gradient of toluene:diethylamine (95:5 to 92:8) to afford the title compound, 140mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3) 400MHz) δ: 1.15-1.47 (m, 9H), 172-1.94 (m, 4H), 2.55 (m, 1 H), 2.99 (dd, 1 H), 3.03-3.20 (m, 2H), 3.39 (dd, 1 H), 3.73 (s, 3H), 3.90 (m, 1 H), 4.42 (d, 1 H), 4.56 (m, 2H), 6.78 (d, 2H), 7.02-7.19 (m, 5H), 7.20 (m, 2H), 7.74 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 474 [MH+]
Preparation 82 4-(Cvclohexyloxy)phenylboronic acid
Figure imgf000101_0002
A solution of 4-(cyclohexyloxy)phenylbromide (J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1978; 3559) in tetrahydrofuran (40ml) was degassed then cooled to -78°C. n-Butyl lithium
(13.47ml, 1.45M in hexanes, 19.5mmol) was added dropwise, and the mixture was stirred for 30 minutes. Triisopropyl borate (5.01 ml, 26.6mmol) was added dropwise over 10 minutes, and the mixture was allowed to warm slowly, with stirring, to room temperature, then poured into sodium hydroxide solution (0.25M, 300ml). This mixture was stirred for 15 minutes then extracted with diethyl ether (2x150ml). The aqueous layer was acidified to pH 1 using concentrated hydrochloric acid and extracted with dichloromethane (2x150ml). These combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a white solid, 3.1 g. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.88-1.62 (m, 7H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 2.00 (m, 2H), 4.39 (m, 1 H), 6.98 (d, 2H), 8.17 (d, 2H).
Preparation 83
(2S.6/?)-2- i-[4-(Cvclohexyloxy)phenyl1-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl)-4-(4- methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000102_0001
The title compound was obtained in 41% yield from the imidazole of Preparation 55 and the boronic acid of Preparation 82 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 81. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.19 (d, 3H), 1.38 (m, 3H), 1.57 (m, 3H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 1.99 (m, 2H), 2.99 (dd, 1 H), 3.04-3.20 (m, 2H), 3.39 (dd, 1 H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 3.88 (m, 1 H), 4.22 (m, 1 H), 4.42 (d, 1 H), 4.56 (m, 1 H), 4.60 (d, 1 H), 6.79 (d, 2H), 6.96 (d, 2H), 7.02 (s, 1 H), 7.10-7.28 (m, 4H), 7.65 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 490 [MH+]
Preparation 84
(2RS)2-(M -f4'-Chlorof 1.1 '-biphenyll-3-vn-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-4-(4- methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000103_0001
A mixture of the bromide of Preparation 73 (200mg, 0.44mmol), 4-chlorophenyl- boronic acid (207mg, 1.32mmol), lithium chloride (56mg, 1.32mmol), cesium carbonate (433mg, 1.32mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (51 mg, 0.044mmol) in water (2ml) and tetrahydrofuran (5ml) was stirred at 75°C for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane and 2M sodium carbonate solution containing 6% v/v 0.88 ammonia. The organic phase was separated, dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of toluene:diethylamine (95:5 to 93:7) to afford the title compound as a pale yellow oil, 150mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.05 (m, 1 H), 3.20 (dd, 1 H), 3.42 (m, 2H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 3.78 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.48 (d, 1 H), 4.58 (dd, 1 H), 4.62 (d, 1 H), 6.78 (d, 2H), 7.14 (d, 2H), 7.20 (s, 1 H), 7.35-7.59 (m, 8H), 7.82 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 85 (2S.6f?)-2-(M -O'-ChloroM .1 '-biphenyll-3-yl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vnmethyl)-4-(4- methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000103_0002
The title compound was obtained as a white solid in 63% yield from the bromide of Preparation 77 and 3-chlorobenzeneboronic acid following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 84. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.20 (d, 3H), 3.00 (dd, 1 H), 3.07-3.21 (m, 2H), 3.41 (dd, 1 H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 3.90 (m, 1 H), 4.44 (d, 1 H), 4.58 (m, 2H), 6.78 (d, 2H), 7.13 (d, 2H), 7.20-7.58 (m, 9H), 7.82 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 502, 504 [MHl
Preparation 86 (2RS)-2-(M -(3'.4'-Dichloroπ .1 '-biphenyll-3-vh-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-4-(4- methoxybenzyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000104_0001
A mixture of the bromide of Preparation 73 (200mg, 0.44mmol), 3,4-dichloro- benzeneboronic acid (102mg, 0.53mmol), lithium chloride (56mg, 1.32mmol), cesium carbonate (433mg, 1.32mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (26mg, 0.022mmol) in water (2ml) and tetrahydrofuran (5ml), was stirred at 75°C for 2.5 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional 3,4- dichlorobenzeneboronic acid (204mg, 1.Oβmmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)- palladium(O) (26mg, 0.022mmol) were added and the mixture was heated for a further 18 hours at reflux. The cooled mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane and 2M sodium carbonate solution containing 6% v/v 0.88 ammonia. The organic phase was separated, dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of toluene:diethylamine (95:5 to 93:7) to afford the title compound as a crystalline solid, 165mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.06 (m, 1 H), 3.20 (dd, 1 H), 3.41 (m, 2H), 3.75 (m, 4H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.48 (d, 1 H), 4.58 (m, 1 H), 4.62 (d, 1 H), 6.58 (2xs, 2H), 7.18 (m, 3H), 7.40 (m, 2H), 7.52 (m, 4H), 7.65 (s, 1 H), 7.82 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 522, 524 [MH+] Preparation 87
(2S.6r7)-2-(M - 3'.4'-Dichloroπ ,1 '-biphenvn-3-vπ-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyl)-4- 4- methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000105_0001
A mixture of the bromide of Preparation 77 (200mg, 0.425mmol), 3,4-dichloro- benzeneboronic acid (243mg, 1.27mmol), lithium chloride (54mg, 1.27mmol), cesium carbonate (416mg, 1.32mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (23mg, 0.02mmol) in water (2ml) and tetrahydrofuran (5ml) was stirred at 75°C for 3 hours. The cooled mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (100ml) and water (50ml). The organic phase was separated, dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of pentane:ethyl acetate: methanol (50:50:0 to 0:100:0 to 0:95:5) to give a white foam. This was further purified by column chromatography using a Biotage® silica gel column, and an elution gradient of ethyl acetate: methanol (100:0 to 93:7) to afford the title compound as a white foam, 140mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3,
400MHz) δ: 1.20 (d, 3H), 3.00-3.21 (m, 3H), 3.40 (m, 1 H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 3.90 (m, 1 H), 4.42 (m, 1 H), 4.59 (m, 2H), 6.78 (d, 2H), 7.13 (d, 2H), 7.19 (s, 1 H), 7.38 (m, 1 H), 7.40 (m, 1 H), 7.50 (m, 4H), 7.65 (s, 1 H), 7.81 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 536, 538 [MHl
Preparation 88 (2S)-2-f(1 -Propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl1-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000105_0002
Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (4.55g, 8.30mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 47 (1.43g, 4.15mmol) in acetonitrile (9ml) and water (9ml) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in methanol. This solution was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (95:5:0.5 to 90:10:1) to afford an orange oil. This was further purified by column chromatography on Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion exchange resin, using an elution gradient of water:0.88 ammonia (100:0 to 98:2) to afford the title compound, 522mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.88 (t, 3H), 175 (m, 2H), 3.00 (dd, 1 H), 3.23 (m, 2H), 3.50 (m, 1 H), 3.74 (m, 1 H), 3.79 (t, 2H), 4.00 (m, 1H), 4.43 (dd, 1 H), 5.94 (bs, 1 H), 6.73 (s, 1 H), 7.36 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 224 [MH4]
Preparation 89 (2RS)-2-f(1 -Butyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl1-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000106_0001
Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (57g, 10.4mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 48 (1.87g, 5.2mmol) in acetonitrile (50ml) and water (50ml), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The solvents were evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified using a Dowex® 50WX8-200 ion-exchange column and 5% 0.88 ammonia as eluant. This product was further purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0 to 90:10:1) to afford the title compound, 300mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.96 (t, 3H), 1.34 (m, 2H), 1.75 (m, 2H), 3.02 (dd, 1 H), 3.28 (m, 2H), 3.56 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 1 H), 3.82 (t, 2H), 4.02 (m, 1 H), 4.48 (dd, 1 H), 5.98 (bs, 1 H), 6.77 (s, 1 H), 7.38 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 238 [MHl Preparation 90 (2RS)-2-(π- 2-Cvclohexylethvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000107_0001
Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.1g, 2.0mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 49 (411 mg, 1.Ommol) in acetonitrile (5ml) and water (5ml), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was pre-adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0:0 to 75:0:25:0 to 0:90:10:1). The product was further purified by column chromatography on reverse phase polystyrene gel, using an elution gradient of water:methanol (100:0 to 0:100) to afford the title compound, 522mg. Η-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 1.01 (m, 2H), 1.24 (m, 4H), 176 (m, 7H), 3.22 (m, 3H), 3.40 (m, 1 H), 3.80 (m, 1 H), 4.02 (m, 1 H), 4.22 (m, 2H), 4.38 (m, 1 H), 7.43 (s, 1 H), 8.85 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 292.2 [MH^
Preparation 91 (2 ?.6S)-2-([1-(2-Cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl -6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000107_0002
Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (387mg, 0758mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 61 (120mg, 0.283mmol) in acetonitrile (8ml) and water (5ml) and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was pre-adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound as a colourless oil, 66mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.92 (m, 2H), 1.18 (m, 7H), 1.62 (m, 7H), 2.98 (dd, 1 H), 3.18 (m, 2H), 3.23 (dd, 1 H), 3.83 (m, 3H), 4.41 (m, 1 H), 6.19 (bs, 1 H), 6.70 (s, 1 H), 7.30 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 328 [MNa÷]
Preparation 92 (2S.6r?)-2-(π-(2-Cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
The title compound was obtained as a pale yellow solid in 63% yield from the protected morpholinone of Preparation 62 following the procedure described in Preparation 91. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.92 (m, 2H), 1.18 (m, 7H), 1.62 (m, 7H), 2.98 (dd, 1 H), 3.19 (m, 2H), 3.23 (dd, 1 H), 3.83 (m, 3H), 4.41 (m, 1 H), 6.03 (bs, 1 H), 6.70 (s, 1 H), 7.34 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 328 [MNa+]
Preparation 93 (2S.6 ?)-2-(f1-[2-(4.4-Dimethylcvclohexyl)ethvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl)-6-methyl-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000108_0002
The title compound was obtained in 53% yield from the protected morpholinone of Preparation 66 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 91 , except that ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (99:0.5:0.5 to 95:2.5:2.5) was used as the column eluant. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.82 (2xs, 6H), 1.10 (d, 3H), 1.18-1.38 (m, 8H), 1.48 (m, 1 H), 1.63 (m, 2H), 2.98 (m, 1 H), 3.19 (m, 2H), 3.23 (dd, 1 H), 3.84 (m, 3H), 4.41 (m, 1 H), 6.97 (bs, 1 H), 7.21 (s, 1 H), 7.34 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 334 [MH
Preparation 94
^S.effl^-lfl-O-Cvclohexyl-S-methylbutvD-l fy-imidazol^-vnmethvD-δ-methyl-S- morpholinone
Figure imgf000109_0001
The title compound was obtained in 52% yield from the protected morpholinone of Preparation 65 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 91 , except that dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 93:7:07) was used as the column eluant. 1 H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 0.86 (s, 6H), 1.00 (m, 2H), 1.03-1.28 (m, 7H), 1.70 (m, 7H), 2.90 (m, 1 H), 3.03 (m, 1 H), 3.18 (m, 2H), 3.82 (m, 1 H), 3.95 (m, 2H), 4.36 (m, 1 H), 5.42 (s, 1 H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 7.50 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 348 [MH+]
Preparation 95 (2S.5S)-2-(ri-(2-Cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vnmethyl)-5-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000109_0002
A mixture of the protected morpholinone of Preparation 63 (170mg, 0.4mmol) and ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (550mg, 1.Ommol) in water (1 ml) and acetonitrile (1 ml) was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography using a Biotage® silica gel column and an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:diethylamine (95:5 to 80:20) to afford the title compound, 18mg. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.97 (m, 2H), 1.20 (m, 7H), 1.66 (m, 7H), 3.06 (dd, 1 H), 3.25 (dd, 1 H), 3.58 (m, 1 H), 3.65 (dd, 1 H), 3.83 (m, 3H), 4.43 (dd, 1 H), 6.15 (bs, 1 H), 6.78 (s, 1 H), 7.38 (s, 1 H). Preparation 96 f2ff.5f?)-2-(f1-(2-Cvclohexylethvn-1 H-imidazol-4-vnmethyl)-5-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000110_0001
The title compound was obtained in 34% from the protected morpholinone of Preparation 64 following the procedure described in Preparation 95. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 078-0.98 (m, 2H), 1.03-1.22 (m, 7H), 1.62 (m, 7H), 3.02 (m, 1 H), 3.18 (dd, 1 H), 3.55 (m, 1 H), 3.61 (dd, 1 H), 3.77 (dd, 1 H), 3.82 (t, 2H), 4.38 (m, 1 H), 6.24 (bs, 1 H), 6.73 (s, 1 H), 7.37 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 97
(2RS)-2-(π-(2-Phenylethyl)-1 ry-imidazol-4-vπmethyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000110_0002
Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (883mg, 1.6mmol) was added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 50 (326mg, 0.81 mmol) in acetonitrile (2.4ml) and water (2.4ml) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 days, then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in methanol and adsorbed onto silica gel, then purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0 to 90:10:1) to afford the title compound as an orange oil, 97mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3) 400MHz) δ: 3.02 (m, 3H), 3.26 (m, 2H), 3.52 (m, 1 H), 3.77 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.10 (t, 2H), 4.43 (dd, 1 H), 5.99 (bs, 1 H), 6.70 (s, 1 H), 7.05 (d, 2H), 7.24 (m, 4H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 286 [MH4] Preparation 98 2RS)-2-((1-r2-(4-Bromophenyl)ethvn-1H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000111_0001
A solution of ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.35g, 2.48mmol) in water (5ml) was added to a solution of the bromide of Preparation 59 (600mg, 1.24mmol) in acetonitrile (10ml) and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (308mg, 0.56mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for a further 2 hours. The cooled mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound, 250mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 2.98 (t, 2H), 3.03 (m, 1 H), 3.25 (m, 2H), 3.52 (m, 1 H), 3.77 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1H), 4.05 (t, 2H), 4.42 (m, 1H), 5.99 (bs, 1 H), 6.65 (s, 1 H), 6.93 (d, 2H), 7.22 (s, 1 H), 7.40 (d, 2H).
Preparations 99 to 101 The following compounds of general structure
Figure imgf000111_0002
were prepared from the corresponding protected morpholinones following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 98.
Figure imgf000112_0001
eluant
Preparation 102 (2RS)-2-([1-(3-Phenoxyphenyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000112_0002
A solution of ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (350mg, 063mmol) in water (2ml) was added to a solution of the protected morpholine of Preparation (120mg, 0.256mmol) in acetonitrile (2ml), and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (500mg, 0.91 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for a further 8 hours. The mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between dichloromethane (50ml) and a solution of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (1g) in saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (50ml). The phases were separated and the organic layer was dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (100:0:0 to 96:2:2) to afford the title compound, 25mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.05 (dd, 1 H), 3.21-3.18 (m, 2H), 3.57 (m, 1 H), 3.77 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.48 (dd, 1 H), 6.15 (bs, 1 H), 6.90 (d, 1 H), 6.98 (s, 1 H), 7.02 (m, 3H), 7.14 (m, 2H), 7.37 (m, 3H), 7.74 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 350.0 [MH+]
Preparation 103 (2RS)-2-(π-(2-Naphthyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vnmethyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000113_0001
The title compound was obtained as a yellow gum in 56% yield from the protected morpholinone of Preparation 72, following a similar procedure to that described in
Preparation 102, except that dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0 to
90:10:1) was used as the column eluant. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.15 (dd, 1 H), 3.23 (m, 1 H), 3.38 (dd, 1 H), 3.58 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 1 H), 4.02 (m, 1 H), 4.53 (dd,
1 H), 6.01 (bs, 1 H), 7.22 (d, 2H), 7.48 (m, 3H), 775-7.94 (m, 4H). LRMS: m/z (ES+)
308 [MH+]
Preparation 104 (-H2S)-2-!M -Phenyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000113_0002
Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.43g, 2.61 mmol) was added to a solution of the protected morpholinone of Preparation 74 (330mg, 0.87mmol) in water (2ml) and acetonitrile (2ml), and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 4 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.43g, 2.61 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for a further 2 hours. The mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane (200ml) and a solution of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (1g) in saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (50ml). The phases were separated and the organic layer was dried (MgSO4) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (100:0:0 to 96:2:2). The product was azeotroped with toluene and dichloromethane to afford the title compound as an oil, 173mg. Η- NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.14 (dd, 1 H), 3.28 (m, 1 H), 3.38 (dd, 1 H), 3.58 (m, 1 H), 3.80 (m, 1 H), 4.05 (m, 1 H), 4.56 (dd, 1 H), 5.98 (bs, 1 H), 7.17 (s, 1 H), 7.37 (m, 3H), 7.45 (m, 2H), 779 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 258.1 [MH+] [α]D = -70.59, (c = 0.104, methanol)
Preparation 105 (2S)-2-(ri-(4-tet -Butylphenyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vnmethyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000114_0001
Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (297mg, 0.55mmol) was added to a solution of the protected morpholinone of Preparation 75 (94mg, 0.22mmol) in water (2ml) and acetonitrile (2ml), and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 15 hours. Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (0.5g) in saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5ml) was added and the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (2x50ml). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (98:1 :1 to 94:3:3), to afford the title compound as an oil, 22mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.37 (s, 9H), 3.12 (dd, 1 H), 3.26 (m, 1 H), 3.38 (dd, 1 H), 3.58 (m, 1 H), 3.79 (m, 1 H), 4.04 (m, 1 H), 4.55 (m, 1 H), 6.22 (bs, 1 H), 7.10 (s, 1 H), 7.25 (d, 2H), 7.42 (d, 2H), 7.77 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 314.1 [MH+]
Preparation 106 (-)-(2S)-2- i-[3.5-Bisαrifluoromethvnphenvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methvn-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000115_0001
The title compound was obtained as a solid in 81% yield from the protected morpholinone of Preparation 76 following the procedure described in Preparation 105. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.18 (dd, 1H), 3.30 (m, 1H), 3.39 (dd, 1 H), 3.60 (m, 1 H), 3.80 (m, 1 H), 4.06 (m, 1 H), 4.55 (m, 1 H), 5.88 (bs, 1 H), 7.20 (s, 1 H), 7.81 (s, 2H), 7.84 (s, 1 H), 7.87 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 394.0 [MH+]. [α]D = -40.35, (c = 0.116, methanol)
Preparation 107 (2RS)-2-iπ -(4'-Chloroπ .1 '-biphenvn-3-vπ-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000115_0002
The title compound was obtained as a solid in 91% yield from the protected morpholinone of Preparation 84 following the procedure described in Preparation 105. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.10 (dd, 1H), 3.25 (m, 1 H), 3.38 (dd, 1H), 3.57 (m, 1H), 3.78 (m, 1 H), 4.02 (m, 1H), 4.52 (dd, 1 H), 5.96 (bs, 1H), 7.17 (s, 1 H), 7.37 (m, 3H), 7.42 (m, 1 H), 7.50 (m, 3H), 7.57 (s, 1 H), 7.80 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES') 366 (M-H')
Preparation 108 (2RS)-2-(ri-(3'.4'-Dichloroπ .1 '-biphenvn-3-yl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000116_0001
The title compound was obtained in 49% yield from the protected morpholinone of Preparation 86 following the procedure described in Preparation 105. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 3.10 (dd, 1 H), 3.25 (m, 1 H), 3.38 (dd, 1 H), 3.57 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 1 H), 4.02 (m, 1 H), 4.52 (dd, 1 H), 5.86 (bs, 1 H), 7.18 (s, 1 H), 7.37 (m, 2H), 7.50 (m, 4H), 7.62 (s, 1 H), 7.80 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 402, 404 (MH+)
Preparations 109 to 114 The following compounds of the general structure
Figure imgf000116_0002
were prepared from the appropriate protected morpholinones, following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 105.
Figure imgf000116_0003
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000118_0001
1 = Acetonitrile:water (3:1 , by volume) was used as the reaction solvent
2 = Acetonitrile:water (2:1 , by volume) was used as the reaction solvent
Preparation 115 (2S,6 ?)-2-(M -(3',4'-Dichloroπ .1 '-biphenyl]-3-yl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl1methyl)-6-methyl-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000118_0002
The title compound was obtained as a white foam in 63% yield from the protected morpholinone of Preparation 87 following a similar procedure to that described in Preparation 105. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.24 (d, 3H), 3.14 (dd, 1 H), 3.23 (m, 2H), 3.40 (dd, 1 H), 3.97 (m, 1 H), 4.56 (dd, 1 H), 5.80 (bs, 1 H), 7.10 (s, 1 H), 7.40 (m, 2H), 7.55 (m, 4H), 7.68 (s, 1 H), 7.81 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 416.1 , 420.1 [MH+]
Preparation 116 (2S)-2-(1 H-lmidazol-4-ylmethyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000118_0003
A mixture of the protected morpholinone of Preparation 53 (500mg, 1.66mmol), and ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (2.5g, 4.5mmol) in water (6ml) and acetonitrile (6ml) was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours. Potassium carbonate (1.5g) was added and the mixture was stirred for 10 minutes then adsorbed onto silica gel. The product was isolated by column chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate:methanol:diethylamine (96:2:2 to 80:10:10) and was further purified by column chromatography on silica gel using dichloromethane:methanol (90:10 to 85:15) to afford the title compound, 240mg. 1 H-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 3.02- 3.42 (m, 4H), 3.78 (m, 1 H0, 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.38 (m, 1 H), 6.75 (s, 1 H), 778 (s, 1 H). HRMS: m/z (ES+) 182.0924 [MH+]
Preparation 117 (-)-(2S.6r?)-2-(1 H-imidazol-4-ylmethyl)-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
CH3
Figure imgf000119_0001
A mixture of the protected morpholinone of Preparation 55 (1g, 3.2mmol) and ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (5.2g, 9.6mmol) in water (20ml) and acetonitrile (30ml) was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was suspended in a mixture of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 by volume) and purified twice by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (90:10:1). The resulting oil was azeotroped with diethyl ether to afford the title compound as a colourless foam, 380mg. Η-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) δ: 1.21 (d, 3H), 3.02 (m, 2H), 3.19 (m, 2H), 3.90 (m, 1 H), 4.36 (m, 1 H), 6.81 (s, 1 H), 7.54 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 196 [MH+]. [α]D= -104.56 (c = 0.19, methanol) Preparation 118 tert-Butyl (2S)-2-ff 1 -(tert-butoxycarbonvh-l V-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-3-oxo-4- morpholinecarboxylate
Figure imgf000120_0001
A solution of the morpholinone of Preparation 116 (70mg, 0.39mmol), dimethylaminopyridine (3mg) and di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (354mg, 1.62mmol) in acetonitrile (5ml) was stirred at room temperature for 42 hours. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound, 96mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.58 (s, 9H), 1.61 (s, 9H), 3.04 (dd, 1 H), 3.35 (dd, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 3H), 4.05 (m, 1 H), 4.50 (m, 1 H), 7.20 (s, 1 H), 8.00 (s, 1 H). HRMS: m/z (ES+) 382.1972 [MH+]
Preparation 119 tert-Butyl (2S.6 ?)-2-((1 -[4-(cvclohexyloxy)phenvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methvπ-6-methyl-
3-oxomorpholine-4-carboxylate
Figure imgf000120_0002
4-Dimethylaminopyridine (49mg, 0.4mmol) and di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (174mg, O.δmmol) were added to a solution of the morpholinone of Preparation 114 (135mg, 0.37mmol) in acetonitrile (5ml), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (87mg, 0.4mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for a further 18 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate as eluant, to give the title compound, 95mg. LRMS: m/z (ES+) 470 [MH4]
Preparation 120 Lithium (2S)-2-(U1 ffl-2-r(tert-butoxycarbonyl)aminol-1 -methylethyl)oxy)-3-(1 -f4- (cvclohexyloxy)phenyl]-1 r7-imidazol-4-yl)propanoate
Figure imgf000121_0001
A mixture of the protected morpholinone of Preparation 119 (87mg, 0.19mmol) and lithium hydroxide (24mg, 0.56mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (0.5ml) and water (1 ml) was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the title compound. Η-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 0.60 (m, 2H), 1.00-1.38 (m, 16H), 1.50 (m, 2H), 170 (m, 2H), 2.58 (m, 1 H), 2.80 (m, 2H), 2.94 (m, 1 H), 3.30 (m, 1 H), 3.82 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 6.63 (d, 2H), 6.82 (s, 1 H), 7.00 (d, 2H), 7.56 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES ) 486 [M-H]"
Preparation 121
(2RS)-2-(f 1 -r2-(4'-Ethviπ .1 '-biphenylM-vDethyll-l H-imidazol-4-yl)methvh-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000121_0002
A mixture of the bromo compound of Preparation 98 (250mg, 0.69mmol), 4- ethylbenzeneboronic acid (154mg, 1.03mmol), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)- palladium(O) 78mg, 0.068mmol) and sodium carbonate solution (411μl, 2M, 0.823mmol) in water (1 ml) and dioxan (5ml) was heated at 100°C for 3 hours. The cooled reaction mixture was diluted with water (10ml), and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3x15ml). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1:0.1 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound, 170mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 1.22 (t, 3H), 2.64 (q, 2H), 3.02 (m, 3H), 3.22 (m, 2H), 3.44 (m, 1H), 3.72 (m, 1 H), 3.98 (m, 1 H), 4.10 (t, 2H), 4.42 (m, 1 H), 5.90 (bs, 1 H), 670 (s, 1H), 7.08 (d, 2H), 7.22 (m, 3H), 7.44 (m, 4H).
Preparations 122 to 131
Figure imgf000122_0001
Aryl boronic acids (R-B(OH)2), (0.74mmol) were added to solutions of the bromo compound of Preparation 98 (180mg, 0.49mmol) tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)- palladium(O) (56mg, 0.051 mmol) and sodium carbonate solution (295μl, 2M,
0.593mmol) in water (1 ml) and dioxan (5ml). The reaction mixtures were heated to 100°C for 4 hours, then allowed to cool. Water (15ml) was added, and the mixtures were extracted with ethyl acetate (3x15ml). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude products were purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (97:3:0.3 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the desired products, shown in the following table.
Figure imgf000122_0002
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
Preparation 132 (2RS)-2-((1-r(2EZ^-3-Bromo-2-propenvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000125_0001
A mixture of ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (2.6g, 475mmol) and the compound of Preparation 67 (1g, 2.38mmol) in acetonitrile (10ml) and water (5ml) was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (650mg, 1.19mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for a further 3 hours at 40°C. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and azeotroped with methanol. The crude product was pre-adsorbed onto silica gel and purified twice by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1:0.1 to 95:5:0.5) to afford the title compound, 370mg. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 3.00 (m, 1H), 3.23 (m, 2H), 3.50 (m, 1H), 3.74 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.42 (m, 2H), 4.62 (d, 1H), 5.98 (bs, 1 H), 6.26 (m, 1.5H), 6.42 (d, 0.5H), 6.75 (2xs, 1 H), 7.40 (2xs, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 300, 302 [MH+]
Preparation 133 (-)-(2S)-2-(ri-(2-Cvclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yllmethyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000125_0002
Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (482mg, 0.88mmol) and water (1 ml) were added to a solution of the compound of Preparation 60 (181mg, 0.44mmol) in acetonitrile (1 ml) and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate was added (250mg, 0.46mmol) and the mixture was stirred at 40°C for a further 5 hours. The mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane (75ml) and a solution of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (1g) in aqueous sodium bicarbonate (30ml), and the phases were separated. The organic layer was dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (100:0:0 to 94:6:0.6) to afford the title compound as a sticky gum, 80mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.97 (m, 2H), 1.20 (m, 4H), 1.63 (m, 7H), 3.02 (dd, 1 H), 3.26 (m, 2H), 3.56 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 1 H), 3.86 (t, 2H), 4.02 (m, 1 H), 4.45 (m, 1 H), 5.83 (bs, 1 H), 6.76 (s, 1 H), 7.38 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 292.1 [MHl. D = -60.01 , (c = 0.05, methanol)
Preparation 134 (2RS)-2-((1 -K2EZΪ-3-M .1 '-Biphenyl]-4-yl-2-propenvn-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl)-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000126_0001
A mixture of the bromo compound of Preparation 132 (185mg, 0.62mmol), 4- biphenylboronic acid (183mg, 0.925mmol), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (72mg, 0.062mmol) and sodium carbonate (78mg, 074mmol) in water (3ml) and dioxan (6ml) was heated at 100°C for 3 hours, then cooled and partitioned between water (20ml) and ethyl acetate (20ml). The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (10ml). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane: methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 98:2:0.2) to afford the title compound as a white foam, 100mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 3.00 (m, 1 H), 3.22 (m, 2H), 3.54 (m, 1 H), 3.75 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.44 (m, 1 H), 4.62 (m, 1 H), 4.78 (m, 1 H), 5.80, 6.26 (2xm, 1 H), 5.93 (bs, 1 H), 6.54, 6.66-6.80 (2xm, 2H), 7.23-7.60 (m, 10H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 374 [MH+] Preparations 135 to 137 The following compounds of general structure
Figure imgf000127_0001
were prepared from the bromide of Preparation 132 and the appropriate boronic acid, following similar procedures to that described in Preparation 134.
Figure imgf000127_0002
1 = isolated without column chromatography Preparation 138 (2RS)-2- i-r(2EZ)-3-(4-Bromophenvπ-2-propenyll-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl)-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000128_0001
The title compound was obtained in 42% yield from the compound of Preparation 67 and 4-bromobenzeneboronic acid following the procedure described in Preparation 134. ' H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 3.00 (m, 1 H), 3.25 (m, 2H), 3.54 (m, 1 H), 3.76 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.43 (m, 1 H), 4.59-479 (m, 2H), 5.80, 6.22 (2xm, 2H), 6.40, 6.62 (2xm, 1 H), 6.72, 6.78 (2xs, 1 H), 7.06 (d, 1 H), 7.19 (d, 1 H), 7.38-7.58 (m, 3H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 376.1 , 378.1 [MH+]
Preparation 139 (2RS)-2-((1-r(2EZ)-3-(4,-Methviri .1'-biphenvn-4-yl)-2-propenvn-1 H-imidazol-4- yl)methyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000128_0002
A mixture of the bromo compound of Preparation 138 (132mg, 0.35mmol), 4- methylbenzeneboronic acid (72mg, 0.53mmol), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)- palladium(O) (50mg, 0.04mmol) and sodium carbonate (270μl, 2M, 0.53mmol) in dioxan (6ml) was heated at 100°C for 1.5 hours. The cooled reaction mixture was partitioned between water (20ml) and ethyl acetate (20ml) and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (10ml) and the combined organic extracts were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residual yellow oil was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 98:2:0.2) to afford the title compound as a white foam, 77mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 2.38 (2xs, 3H), 3.00 (m, 1 H), 3.25 (m, 2H), 3.54 (m, 1 H), 3.75 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.43 (m, 1 H), 4.62 (m, 1 H), 478 (m, 1 H), 5.78, 6.28 (2xm, 2H), 6.55, 6.68-6.80 (2xm, 2H), 7.22 (m, 3H), 7.38-7.63 (m, 6H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 388 [MH+]
Preparation 140 (2RS)-2-((1 -r(2EZ)-3-(4'-Chloror 1.1 '-biphenvπ-4-yl)-2-propenyll-1 H-imidazol-4-yll- methyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000129_0001
A mixture of the bromo compound of Preparation 138 (100mg, 0.27mmol), 4- chlorobenzeneboronic acid (63mg, 0.4mmol), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)- palladium(O) (31 mg, 0.027mmol) and sodium carbonate solution (400μl, 2M, 079mmol) in ethanol (1 ml) and toluene (4ml) was heated at 100°C for 3 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so dioxan (3ml), additional 4- chlorobenzeneboronic acid (21 mg, 0.13mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)- palladium(O) (15mg, 0.013mmol) were added, and the mixture was stirred at 100°C for a further 6 hours. The cooled reaction mixture was partitioned between water (10ml) and ethyl acetate (20ml) and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (10ml) and the combined organic extracts were dried (MgS04) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2) as eluant to afford the title compound as a white solid, 60mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 3.02 (m, 1 H), 3.27 (m, 2H), 3.57 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 1 H), 4.02 (m 1 H), 4.47 (m, 1 H), 4.65, 4.79 (2xd, 2H), 5.82, 6.32 (m, 1 H), 6.18 (bs, 1 H), 6.57, 6.82 (2xm, 2H), 7.30 (d, 1 H), 7.39-779 (m, 8H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 430 [MNa+] Preparation 141 (2RS)-2-((1 -r(2E -3-(2'.5'-Difluoro[1.1 '-biphenvn-4-vh-2-propenyl]-1 H-imidazol-4- yl}methyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000130_0001
The title compound was obtained from the compound of Preparation 138 and 2,5- difluorobenzeneboronic acid following the procedure described in Preparation 140. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of geometric isomers) δ: 3.02 (m, 1 H), 3.28 (m, 2H), 3.57 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 1 H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 4.45 (m, 1 H), 4.63 (d, 1 H), 4.79 (d, 1 H), 5.82, 6.36 (m, 1 H), 6.14 (bs, 1 H), 6.58, 6.79 (2xm, 2H), 7.00 (m, 1 H), 7.14 (m, 2H), 7.32 (d, 1 H), 7.40-770 (m, 4H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 432 [MNa+]
Preparation 142 tert-Butyl (2flS)-2-r2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy1-3-(1 -propyl-1 /--imidazol-4-yl)propanoate
Figure imgf000130_0002
A mixture of the alkene of Preparation 44 (650mg, 2.01 mmol) and 10% palladium on charcoal (Degussa® 101) (60mg) in ethanol (20ml) was hydrogenated at 50°C and 60 psi (41 OkPa) for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was filtered through Arbocel® and the filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:diethylamine:methanol (100:0:0 to 97:1.5:1.5) to afford the title compound, 502mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.92 (t, 3H), 1.42 (s, 9H), 177 (m, 2H), 2.21 (s, 6H), 2.48 (t, 2H), 2.90-3.03 (m, 2H), 3.42 (m, 1H), 3.70 (m, 1 H), 3.80 (t, 2H), 4.08 (m, 1 H), 679 (s, 1 H), 7.37 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (TSP+) 326.2 [MH4] Preparation 143 tert-Butyl (3S)-3-f (1 RS)-2-tert-butoxy-2-oxo-1 -f(1 -propyl-1 H-imidazol-4- vhmethyllethoxyH-pyrrolidinecarboxylate
Figure imgf000131_0001
A mixture of the alkene of Preparation 45 (1.19g, 2.83mmol) and Degussa® 101 catalyst (120mg) in ethanol (12ml) was hydrogenated at 50°C and 60 psi (410kPa) for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional catalyst (120mg) was added and the mixture was hydrogenated at 50°C and 60 psi (41 OkPa) for a further 48 hours. The mixture was filtered through Arbocel®, the catalyst was washed with ethanol, and the combined filtrates were evaporated under reduced pressure. The residual oil was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate as the eluant to afford the title compound as a colourless oil, 227mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.92 (t, 3H), 1.42 (m, 18H), 1.79 (m, 2H), 2.00-2.30 (m, 2H), 2.80-2.95 (m, 1 H), 3.00-3.48 (m, 5H), 3.84 (t, 2H), 4.05-4.20 (m, 2H), 675 (m, 1 H), 7.50 (m, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 424 [MH+]
Preparation 144 (2RS)-2-(π-(3-π .1 '-Biphenyl1-4-ylpropyn-1 H-imidazol-4-vπmethyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000131_0002
A mixture of the alkene of Preparation 134 (100mg, 0.268mmol) and Degussa® 101 catalyst (15mg) in ethanol (12ml) was hydrogenated at 50°C and 60 psi (410kPa) for 6 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining, so additional Degussa® 101 catalyst (20mg) was added and the mixture was hydrogenated for a further 18 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered through Arbocel®, the catalyst was washed with ethanol, and the combined filtrates were evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 98:2:0.2) to afford the title compound as a colourless oil, 70mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 2.10 (m, 2H), 2.61 (t, 2H), 3.02 (dd, 1 H), 3.23 (m, 2H), 3.49 (m, 1H), 3.74 (m, 1H), 3.86 (t, 2H), 4.00 (m, 1H), 4.42 (m, 1H), 6.20 (bs, 1H), 7.20 (d, 2H), 7.29 (m, 1H), 7.39 (m, 4H), 7.50 (d, 2H), 7.54 (d, 2H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 398 [MNa÷]
Preparations 145 to 150 The following compounds of general structure
Figure imgf000132_0001
were prepared from the appropriate alkenes, following similar procedures to that described in Preparation 144.
Figure imgf000132_0002
Figure imgf000133_0001
= isolated without column chromatography
Preparation 151 (2S.6 ?)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-2-(n-(2-pyridinvn-1 fy-imidazol-4-vnmethyl)-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000134_0001
A mixture of the imidazole of Preparation 55 (566mg, 1.8mmol), copper (I) oxide (20mg, 0.14mmol) and potassium carbonate (372mg, 27mmol) in 2-bromopyridine (1 ml) was heated at 100°C for 18 hours. The cooled mixture was purified by Biotage® column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of toluene:diethylamine (93:7 to 86:14) to afford the title compound as a foam, 482mg. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (5:1 mixture of regioisomers) δ: 0.94, 1.20 (2xd, 3H), 2.83- 3.23 (m, 4H), 3.63, 3.78 (2xs, 3H), 3.97 (m, 1 H), 4.16, 4.22 (2xd, 1 H), 4.50-4.82 (m, 2H), 6.64, 6.82 (2xd, 2H), 7.00, 7.18 (2xd, 2H), 7.35, 7.44 (2xm, 1 H), 7.59 (m, 2H), 7.96 (m, 1 H), 8.40-8.57 (m, 2H). HRMS: m/z (ES+) 393.1926 [MH4]
Preparation 152 (2S.6 ?)-6-Methyl-2-([1-(2-pyridinyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-vnmethyl)-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000134_0002
A mixture of the protected morpholinone of Preparation 151 (454mg, 1.16mmol) and ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.585g, 2.9mmol) in water (8ml) and acetonitrile
(16ml) was heated at 40°C for 6 hours. The cooled mixture was diluted with methanol (100ml), and the solution was adsorbed onto silica gel. The product was isolated by column chromatography on silica gel using dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (95:5:1) as eluant and further purified by Biotage® column chromatography on silica gel using toluene:diethylamine (92:8) then dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (95:5:1) as eluant to afford the title compound, 204mg. Η-NMR (CD3OD, 400MHz) (7:1 mixture of regioisomers) δ: 1.01 , 1.21 (2xd, 3H), 2.92-336 (m, 4H), 3.78, 3.93 (2xm, 1 H), 4.27, 4.46 (2xm, 1 H), 7.37, 7.45 (2xm, 1 H), 7.58-770 (m, 2H), 7.96, 8.00 (2xm, 1 H), 8.40-8.18 (m, 2H). Preparation 153 (6ffl-2-rHvdroxyπ-propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyll-4-(4-methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-3- morpholinone CH,
Figure imgf000135_0001
A solution of the compound of Preparation 12 (6.81 g, 29.0mmol) in tetrahydrofuran was added dropwise to a solution of lithium diisopropylamide (23.2ml, 1.5M in cyclohexanes, 34.8mmol) at -78°C, and the solution was stirred for a further 20 minutes at -78°C. A solution of the aldehyde of Preparation 1 (4g, 29.0mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (80ml total volume) was then added dropwise, and the mixture was allowed to warm slowly to room temperature. Saturated ammonium chloride solution (50ml) was added, followed by water (100ml), and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residual orange oil was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of ethyl acetate:methanol (98:2 to 95:5) to afford the title compound as an orange oil, 5.71 g. Η-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) (mixture of diastereoisomers) δ: 0.92 (m, 3H), 1.14 (m, 3H), 1.58 (m, 2H), 2.96-3.18 (m, 2H), 378-4.00 (m, 6H), 4.22-476 (m, 3H), 5.06- 5.30 (m, 1 H), 6.81-6.95 (m, 3H), 7.18 (m, 2H), 7.42 (d, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 374 [MH4]
Preparation 154 (2EZ6r7)-4-(4-Methoxybenzyl)-6-methyl-2-f(1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methylidene]-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000135_0002
A mixture of the compound of Preparation 37 (91 g, 164mmol) and water (90ml) in glacial acetic acid (900ml) was heated at 40°C for 1 hour. The cooled mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, diluted with water (400ml) and the resulting precipitate filtered off. The filtrate was washed with ether (2x400ml), then neutralised using sodium bicarbonate and extracted with ethyl acetate (1000ml). This organic solution washed with water, dried (Na2S0 ) and evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the title compound as a gum, 46.4g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3) 400MHz) δ: 1.41 (d, 3H), 3.24 (dd, 1 H), 3.38 (dd, 1 H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 4.34 (m, 1 H), 4.58 (d, 1 H), 4.68 (d, 1H), 6.84 (d, 2H), 6.97 (s, 1H), 7.20 (d, 2H), 7.30 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 155 (2EZ.6r?)-4-(4-Methoxybenzvh-6-methyl-2-f(1-propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methylidene1-
3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000136_0001
Triethylamine (3ml, 2175mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of the alcohol of Preparation 153 (5.41 g, 14.50mmol) in dichloromethane (60ml), and the solution was cooled to 0°C. Methanesulphonyl chloride (1.68ml, 2175mmol) was added, and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature, then stirred for a further 2 hours. Additional triethylamine (2ml, 14.50mmol) was added, and the mixture was warmed to 35°C, then stirred for 18 hours. The solution was washed with water (100ml), sodium bicarbonate solution (100ml) and brine (50ml), then dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (99:1 :0.1 to 98:2:0.2) to afford one isomer of the title compound as an orange oil, 1.8g, and the second isomer, 260mg. 1H- NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz, major isomer) δ: 0.96 (t, 3H), 1.38 (d, 3H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 3.20 (dd, 1 H), 3.32 (dd, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.86 (t, 2H), 4.25 (m, 1 H), 4.57 (d, 1H), 4.65 (d, 1 H), 6.84 (d, 2H), 7.02 (s, 1 H), 7.20 (d, 2H), 7.35 (s, 1 H), 7.46 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 356 [MH4]. Microanalysis found: C, 63.99; H, 6.88; N, 11.00 C^s^OsϊHzO requires C, 64.32; H, 7.29; N, 11.25%. Preparation 156 (2S.6ffl-4-(4-Methoxybenzvn-6-methyl-2-fπ-propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methyl1-3- morpholinone
Figure imgf000137_0001
A mixture of the alkene of Preparation 155 (1.8g, 5.07mmol) and 10% palladium on charcoal (Degussa type 101) (200mg) in ethanol (50ml) was hydrogenated at 60 psi (410kPa) and 50°C for 18 hours. TLC analysis showed starting material remaining. The mixture was filtered, the filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure, and the residue was re-dissolved in ethanol (50ml). 10% Palladium on charcoal
(Degussa type 101) (200mg) was added and the mixture was hydrogenated at 60psi (41 OkPa) and 50°C for 18 hours, then filtered. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2) to afford the title compound as a colourless oil, 1.35g. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.92 (t, 3H), 1.19 (d, 3H), 178 (m, 2H), 2.98-3.16 (m, 3H), 3.58 (dd, 1 H), 3.82 (m, 6H), 4.50 (m, 3H), 6.75 (s, 1 H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 7.18 (d, 2H), 7.58 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 358 [MH4]. Microanalysis found: C, 62.12; H, 7.58; N, 10.89 C2oH27N3θ3;1.5H20 requires C, 62.48; H, 7.86; N, 10.93%.
Preparation 157 (2S.6f?)-6-Methyl-2-r(1-propyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)methvn-3-morpholinone
CH,
Figure imgf000137_0002
A solution of the compound of Preparation 156 (1.2g, 3.36mmol) in methane- sulphonic acid (5ml) was stirred at 70°C for 2 hours. The cooled mixture was washed with ether (2x20ml) by decantation. Water (20ml) was added and the mixture was basified using 0.88 ammonia, then washed with ethyl acetate (20ml). The aqueous phase was evaporated under reduced pressure, the residue was suspended in acetonitrile, and this mixture was heated to 50°C. The acetonitrile solution was separated by decantation and evaporated under reduced pressure to give an oil. This was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (98:2:0.2 to 96:4:0.4) to afford the title compound as a colourless oil, 560mg. 1 H-NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz) δ: 0.94 (t, 3H), 1.22 (d, 3H), 1.59 (m, 2H), 3.04 (dd, 1 H), 3.18-3.37 (m, 3H), 3.85 (m, 3H), 4.42 (m, 1 H), 6.50 (s, 1 H), 6.79 (s, 1 H), 7.68 (s, 1 H). LRMS: m/z (ES+) 238 [MH4]
Preparation 158 (2f?.6f?)-2-r(1 H-lmidazol-4-yl)methyl1-6-methyl-3-morpholinone
Figure imgf000138_0001
Ammonium cerium (IV) nitrate (1.1g, 2mmol) was added to a solution of the protected lactam of Preparation 55b (200mg, 0.63mmol) in water (4ml) and acetonitrile (4ml) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. The solution was diluted with acetonitrile (5ml) and 0.88 ammonia (4ml), and the mixture was filtered through Arbocel®, washing through with a solution of acetonitrile:water (50:50, 10ml). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and the aqueous residue was washed with ether, then evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel using an elution gradient of dichloromethane:methanol:0.88 ammonia (95:5:0.25 to 92:8:0.4) to afford the title compound as a foam, 88mg. Η-NMR (D20, 400MHz) δ: 1.20 (d, 3H), 3.02-3.30 (m, 6H), 4.01 (m, 1 H), 4.40 (dd, 1 H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 7.58 (s, 1 H).
The compounds of the present invention may be tested using the following assay, which is based on that disclosed in Boffa et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1998, 273, 2127. The compounds are incubated with activated TAFI and a standard substrate for TAFIa, the rate of hydrolysis of the substrate is determined and compared to the rate of hydrolysis in the absence of the compounds, and the amount of inhibition expressed in terms of Kj.
Assay for TAFIa inhibition. i) TAFI activation
Human TAFI (recombinant or purified) was activated by incubating 20μl of stock solution (360μg/ml) with 10μl of human thrombin (10NIH units/ml), 10μl of rabbit thrombomodulin (30μg/ml), 6μl calcium chloride (50mM) in 50μl of 20mM HEPES (N- [2-hydroxyethyl]piperazine-N-[2-ethanesulfonic acid]) buffer containing 150mM sodium chloride and 0.01% TWEEN 80 (polyoxyethylene-sorbitan monooleate) pH 7.6 for 20 minutes at 22°C. At the end of the incubation period, thrombin was neutralised by the addition of 10μL of PPACK (D-Phe-Pro-Arg chloromethyl ketone) (1 OOnM). The resulting TAFIa solution was stored on ice for 5 minutes and finally diluted with 175μl of HEPES buffer.
ii) Kj Determination (TAFIa)
Calculated Kj
A number of different dilutions of the test compound in water were made up. To 20μl of each dilution was added 150μl of HEPES buffer and 10μl of TAFIa, which was then pre-incubated for 15 minutes at 24eC. To each dilution was then added 20μl furylacryloyl-alanyl-lysine (FAAL) at a standard concentration. Substrate turnover was measured by reading the absorbance of the reaction mixture at 330nm every 15 seconds for 30 minutes. The reaction was performed at 24SC and samples were mixed for 3 seconds prior to each absorbance reading.
A graph of % inhibition against test compound concentration was then plotted; from which was calculated the IC5o value. The Kj value was then calculated using the Cheng-Prusoff equation.
Two controls, positive and negative, were used to check the accuracy of the results in each case. For the first control, the assay was performed as above, but with 20μl of water rather than a dilution of the test compound. This showed minimal inhibition. For the second control, the assay was performed as above, but with an effective amount of a non specific carboxypeptidase inhibitor rather than a dilution of the test compound. This showed maximal inhibition. When the two controls did not demonstrate minimal and maximal inhibition respectively then the results were discounted and the test compound was reanalysed.
Using the above assay the compounds of the Examples were found to be potent and selective inhibitors of TAFIa. All the compounds tested had a Kj value less than 20μM. The specific Kj values of certain compounds are detailed below:
Compound of Example: Kj (TAFIa)
4 10 nM
5 10 nM
40 14 nM
49 9 nM
51 26 nM
The selectivity of the compounds of the present invention for TAFIa over CPN was determined by calculating the Kj of the compounds of the present invention for CPN, then comparing it to the Kj for TAFIa. The Kj was calculated using the assay for the calculation of TAFIa Kj, but substituting 10μl of human CPN for 10μl of TAFIa. Those compounds of the present invention tested exhibited a strong selectivity for TAFIa over CPN of the order of >50:1. The specific Kj values and calculated selectivities of certain compounds are detailed below:
Compound of Example: Ki (CPN) Selectivity
5 >10 μM >1000
51 >10 μM >380

Claims

Claims
1 A compound according to formula (I)
Figure imgf000141_0001
(I) wherein: n is 0, 1 , 2 or 3; R1 is selected from
(a) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl group,
(b) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain C2.6 alkenyl group,
(c) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain C2-6 alkynyl group,
(d) Aryl,
(e) Aromatic heterocycle,
(f) Heterocycle, and
(g) hydrogen; where the optional substituents in groups (a), (b) and (c) above are selected from: C3-7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, Heterocycle, OR10, NR10R", S(0)PR'°, OC(0)R11, CO2R10, CONR10R11, SO2NR10R11, halo and NHSO2R10, and where p is 0, 1 or 2; R2, R3, R4, R6, R7 and R9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain C1-6 alkyl optionally substituted by OR10 or halo; R5 and R8 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain C-ι.6 alkyl optionally substituted by OR10 or halo, or together are a C2-6 alkylene chain; R10 and R11 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Ci-6 alkyl;
Aryl is a 6-14 membered aromatic monocyclic or fused polycyclic carbocyclic group optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from R12, halo, OR13, NR13R14, NR13C02R12, C02R13, NR13S02R12, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, S02NR13R14, C(0)NR13R 4, C3-7 cycloakyl, 0(C3-7 cycloalkyl), R15 and OR15, where R12 is straight chain or branched chain Ci-6 alkyl, R13 and R14 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Ci-6 alkyl, and R15 is phenyl optionally substituted by R12, OR13, halo or haloalkyl;
Aromatic heterocycle is a 5 to 7 membered aromatic ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R12, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14 and C(0)NR13R14; and
Heterocycle is a 3 to 8 membered ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, said ring further being optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R14, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14 and C(0)NR13R14, or a tautomer thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of said compound or said tautomer.
A compound according to Claim 1 wherein the substitution pattern of the imidazole is as depicted in formula (ID1)
Figure imgf000143_0001
(ID1)
A compound according to Claim 1 wherein the stereochemistry is as depicted in formula (IA)
Figure imgf000143_0002
(IA)
A compound according to any preceding Claim wherein n is 0 or 1.
A compound according to Claim 4 wherein n is 0.
A compound according to any preceding Claim wherein R1 is hydrogen, Aryl, C2-6 alkenyl or a Ci-β alkyl group optionally substituted by one or more groups selected from C3.7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, OR10, C02R10, halo and NHS02R10.
A compound according to Claim 6 wherein R1 is hydrogen, Aryl or a Ci-6 alkyl group optionally substituted by a group selected from cydohexyl and Aryl R1 is hydrogen, Aryl or Cι-6 alkyl optionally substituted by cydohexyl or Aryl.
A compound according to Claim 7 wherein R1 is hydrogen or C1-3 alkyl.
A compound according to Claim 8 wherein R1 is hydrogen. A compound according to any preceding Claim wherein R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or Cι-6 alkyl.
A compound according to Claim 10 wherein R2 and R3 are both hydrogen.
A compound according to any preceding Claim wherein R4 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl.
A compound according to Claim 12 wherein R4 is hydrogen.
A compound according to any preceding Claim wherein R6, R7 and R9 are each independently hydrogen or Cι-3 alkyl.
A compound according to Claim 14 wherein R6, R7 and R9 are each independently hydrogen or methyl.
A compound according to Claim 15 wherein R6, R7 and R9 are all hydrogen.
A compound according to any preceding Claim wherein R5 is hydrogen or Cι-3 alkyl.
A compound according to Claim 17 wherein R5 is hydrogen or methyl.
A compound according to Claim 18 wherein R5 is methyl.
A compound according to any of Claims 17, 18 and 19 wherein R8 is hydrogen or methyl.
A compound according to Claim 20 wherein R8 is hydrogen.
A compound according to Claim 1 , selected from: (2S)-(-)-2-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-(1 -phenyl-1 /-/-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid; (2S)-2-{[(1 ?)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy}-3-[1 -(2-cyclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4- yl]propanoic acid;
(2S)-2-{[(1 f?)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy}-3-(1 -phenyl-1 H-imidazol-4-yl)- propanoic acid;
(2S)-2-{[(2S)-2-aminopropyl]oxy}-3-[1-(2-cyclohexylethyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl]- propanoic acid;
(2S)-2-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-(1 H-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid;
(2S)-2-{[(1 f7)-2-amino-1-methylethyl]oxy}-3-(1 /-/-imidazol-4-yl)propanoic acid; and
(2S)-2-{[(1 f?)-2-amino-1 -methylethyl]oxy}-3-[1 -(2-pyridinyl)-1 H-imidazol-4-yl]- propanoic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
A compound according to any of Claims 1 to 22 for use as a medicament.
A compound according to any of Claims 1 to 22 for use as a medicament for the treatment of a condition selected from thrombotic conditions, atherosclerosis, adhesions, dermal scarring, cancer, fibrotic conditions, inflammatory diseases and those conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing bradykinin levels in the body.
A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound according to any of Claims 1 to 22 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The use of a compound according to any of Claims 1 to 22 for the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of a condition selected from thrombotic conditions, atherosclerosis, adhesions, dermal scarring, cancer, fibrotic conditions, inflammatory diseases and those conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing bradykinin levels in the body.
A use according to Claim 26 wherein the medicament is for the treatment of a thrombotic condition.
A method of treatment of a condition selected from thrombotic conditions, atherosclerosis, adhesions, dermal scarring, cancer, fibrotic conditions, inflammatory diseases and those conditions which benefit from maintaining or enhancing bradykinin levels in the body, comprising administration of a compound according to any of Claims 1 to 22 to a subject in need of such treatment.
A process for the preparation of a compound according to formula (I)
Figure imgf000146_0001
(I) wherein: n is 0, 1 , 2 or 3;
R1 is selected from
(a) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain Ci-6 alkyl group,
(b) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain C2-β alkenyl group,
(c) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain C2-6 alkynyl group,
(d) Aryl,
(e) Aromatic heterocycle,
(f) Heterocycle, and
(g) hydrogen; where the optional substituents in groups (a), (b) and (c) above are selected from: C3-7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, Heterocycle, OR10, NR10R11, S(0)pR10, OC(0)R11, C02R1°, CONR10R11, SO2NR10R11, halo and NHS02R1°, and where p is 0, 1 or 2; R2, R3, R4, R6, R7and R9 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl optionally substituted by OR10 or halo; R5 and R8 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl optionally substituted by OR10 or halo, or together are a C2-6 alkylene chain; R10 and R11 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Ci-6 alkyl; Aryl is a 6-14 membered aromatic monocyclic or fused polycyclic carbocyclic group optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from R12, halo, OR13, NR13R14, NR13C02R12, C02R13, NR13S02R12, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl). SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, S02NR13R14, C(0)NR13R14, C3-7 cycloakyl, 0(C3-7 cycloalkyl), R15 and OR15, where R12 is straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl, R13 and R14 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl, and R'5 is phenyl optionally substituted by R12, OR13, halo or haloalkyl;
Aromatic heterocycle is a 5 to 7 membered aromatic ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R12, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14 and C(0)NR13R14; and
Heterocycle is a 3 to 8 membered ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, said ring further being optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C0 R13, NR13CO2R14, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, SO2R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14 and C(0)NR13R14, or a tautomer thereof, comprising the steps of:
(i) preparing a compound according to formula (II)
Figure imgf000147_0001
(II) wherein:
P1 is an optionally substituted Cι-6 alkyl group, an optionally substituted C -7 cycloalkyl group, an optionally substituted benzyl group or a tri(Cι-6 alkyl)silyl group; and
R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9 and n are as defined for formula (I); and (ii) treating said compound of formula (II) with a reagent or combination of reagents suitable for removing the P1 group.
A process for the preparation of a compound according to formula (I)
Figure imgf000148_0001
(I) wherein: n is 0, 1 , 2 or 3;
R1 is selected from
(a) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain Ci-β alkyl group,
(b) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain C2-6 alkenyl group,
(c) an optionally substituted straight chain or branched chain C2-6 alkynyl group,
(d) Aryl,
(e) Aromatic heterocycle,
(f) Heterocycle, and
(g) hydrogen; where the optional substituents in groups (a), (b) and (c) above are selected from: C3-7 cycloalkyl, Aryl, Aromatic heterocycle, Heterocycle, OR10, NR10R11, S(0)pR10, OC(0)R11, C02R1°, CONR10R11, SO2NR10R11, halo and NHSO2R10, and where p is 0, 1 or 2; R2, R3, R4, R6 and R7 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl optionally substituted by OR10 or halo; R5 and R8 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Ci-β alkyl optionally substituted by OR10 or halo, or together are a C2-6 alkylene chain;
R9 is hydrogen;
R10 and R11 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl;
Aryl is a 6-14 membered aromatic monocyclic or fused polycyclic carbocyclic group optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from R12, halo, OR13, NR13R14, NR13C02R12, C02R13, NR13S02R12, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, S02NR13R14, C(0)NR13R14, C3-7 cycloakyl, 0(C3-7 cycloalkyl), R15 and OR15, where R12 is straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl, R13 and R14 are each independently selected from hydrogen and straight chain or branched chain Cι-6 alkyl, and R15 is phenyl optionally substituted by R12, OR13, halo or haloalkyl;
Aromatic heterocycle is a 5 to 7 membered aromatic ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R12, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14 and C(0)NR13R14; and
Heterocycle is a 3 to 8 membered ring containing from 1 to 3 heteroatoms, each independently selected from O, S and N, said ring being saturated or partially saturated, said ring further being optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from OR13, NR13R14, C02R13, NR13C02R14, R12, halo, CN, haloalkyl, O(haloalkyl), SR13, S(0)R12, S02R12, OC(0)R13, NR13S02R12, S02NR13R14 and C(0)NR13R14, or a tautomer thereof, comprising the steps of:
(i) preparing a compound according to formula (XIV)
Figure imgf000149_0001
(XIV) wherein: R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8 and n are as defined for formula (I); and (ii) treating said compound of formula (II) with a reagent or combination of reagents suitable for hydrolyzing the amide bond of the lactam ring.
PCT/IB2003/000060 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors WO2003061652A1 (en)

Priority Applications (13)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EA200400716A EA200400716A1 (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3- (IMIDAZOLYL) -2-ALCOXYPROPIONIC ACIDS AS TAFIA INHIBITORS (THROMBIN-ACTIVATED FIBRINOLYSIS INHIBITOR)
EP03700059A EP1467731A1 (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors
CA002472238A CA2472238A1 (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors
BR0307016-6A BR0307016A (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3- (imidazolyl) -2-alkoxypropanoic acids
IL16267703A IL162677A0 (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3-(Imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors
APAP/P/2004/003084A AP2004003084A0 (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors
KR10-2004-7011370A KR20040077775A (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3-(IMIDAZOLYL)-2-ALKOXYPROPANOIC ACIDS AS TAFIa INHIBITORS
JP2003561596A JP2005520811A (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3- (imidazolyl) -2-alkoxypropanoic acid as a TAFIa inhibitor
MXPA04006573A MXPA04006573A (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors.
IS7310A IS7310A (en) 2002-01-22 2004-06-14 3- (imidazolyl) -2-alkoxypropanoic acids which inhibit TAFIa
TNP2004000121A TNSN04121A1 (en) 2002-01-22 2004-06-30 Acides 3 - (imidazolyl) - 2 - alkoxypropanoiques servant d'inhibiteurs de tafia
HR20040659A HRP20040659A2 (en) 2002-01-22 2004-07-19 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors
NO20043457A NO20043457L (en) 2002-01-22 2004-08-19 3- (imidazolyl) -2-alkoxypropanoic acids as TAFIA inhibitors

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
GB0201389A GB0201389D0 (en) 2002-01-22 2002-01-22 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids
GB0201389.4 2002-01-22
GB0202027.9 2002-01-29
GB0202027A GB0202027D0 (en) 2002-01-29 2002-01-29 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2003061652A1 true WO2003061652A1 (en) 2003-07-31
WO2003061652A8 WO2003061652A8 (en) 2004-09-10

Family

ID=27614792

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2003/000060 WO2003061652A1 (en) 2002-01-22 2003-01-10 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors

Country Status (24)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1467731A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2005520811A (en)
KR (1) KR20040077775A (en)
CN (1) CN1620291A (en)
AP (1) AP2004003084A0 (en)
AR (1) AR038197A1 (en)
BR (1) BR0307016A (en)
CA (1) CA2472238A1 (en)
EA (1) EA200400716A1 (en)
EC (1) ECSP045200A (en)
HR (1) HRP20040659A2 (en)
IL (1) IL162677A0 (en)
IS (1) IS7310A (en)
MA (1) MA27167A1 (en)
MX (1) MXPA04006573A (en)
NO (1) NO20043457L (en)
OA (1) OA12756A (en)
PA (1) PA8563501A1 (en)
PE (1) PE20030929A1 (en)
PL (1) PL371487A1 (en)
TN (1) TNSN04121A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200302094A (en)
UY (1) UY27615A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2003061652A1 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005051384A1 (en) * 2003-11-25 2005-06-09 Pfizer Limited Stabilised pharmaceutical compositions
WO2006113247A1 (en) * 2005-04-18 2006-10-26 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Use of tafi inhibitors for enhanced myocardial reperfusion and facilitated pci
WO2010050525A1 (en) 2008-10-29 2010-05-06 大正製薬株式会社 Compound having tafia inhibitory activity
WO2010065717A1 (en) * 2008-12-05 2010-06-10 Mochida Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Morpholinone compounds as factor ixa inhibitors
WO2011115064A1 (en) 2010-03-18 2011-09-22 第一三共株式会社 Cycloalkyl-substituted imidazole derivative
WO2011115065A1 (en) 2010-03-18 2011-09-22 第一三共株式会社 Cyclopropanecarboxylic acid derivative
US8987242B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2015-03-24 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Morpholinone compounds as factor IXA inhibitors
WO2017170460A1 (en) 2016-03-29 2017-10-05 第一三共株式会社 Inflammatory intestinal disease therapeutic agent
US9834527B2 (en) 2013-06-10 2017-12-05 Sanofi Macrocyclic urea derivatives as inhibitors of TAFIa, their preparation and their use as pharmaceuticals
WO2019054427A1 (en) 2017-09-14 2019-03-21 第一三共株式会社 Compound having cyclic structure

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2000066550A1 (en) * 1999-05-03 2000-11-09 Astrazeneca Ab New compounds
WO2002014285A1 (en) * 2000-08-17 2002-02-21 Pfizer Limited Substituted imidazoles as tafia inhibitors

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2000066550A1 (en) * 1999-05-03 2000-11-09 Astrazeneca Ab New compounds
WO2002014285A1 (en) * 2000-08-17 2002-02-21 Pfizer Limited Substituted imidazoles as tafia inhibitors

Cited By (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005051384A1 (en) * 2003-11-25 2005-06-09 Pfizer Limited Stabilised pharmaceutical compositions
WO2006113247A1 (en) * 2005-04-18 2006-10-26 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Use of tafi inhibitors for enhanced myocardial reperfusion and facilitated pci
WO2010050525A1 (en) 2008-10-29 2010-05-06 大正製薬株式会社 Compound having tafia inhibitory activity
US8642582B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2014-02-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Morpholinone compounds as factor IXa inhibitors
WO2010065717A1 (en) * 2008-12-05 2010-06-10 Mochida Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Morpholinone compounds as factor ixa inhibitors
US8987242B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2015-03-24 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Morpholinone compounds as factor IXA inhibitors
WO2011115064A1 (en) 2010-03-18 2011-09-22 第一三共株式会社 Cycloalkyl-substituted imidazole derivative
US8609710B2 (en) 2010-03-18 2013-12-17 Daiichi Sankyo Company, Limited Cycloalkyl-substituted imidazole derivative
KR20130028705A (en) 2010-03-18 2013-03-19 다이이찌 산쿄 가부시키가이샤 Cycloalkyl-substituted imidazole derivative
US8946443B2 (en) 2010-03-18 2015-02-03 Daiichi Sankyo Company, Limited Cyclopropanecarboxylic acid derivative
WO2011115065A1 (en) 2010-03-18 2011-09-22 第一三共株式会社 Cyclopropanecarboxylic acid derivative
KR20160003325A (en) 2010-03-18 2016-01-08 다이이찌 산쿄 가부시키가이샤 Cycloalkyl-substituted imidazole derivative
US9340531B2 (en) 2010-03-18 2016-05-17 Daiichi Sankyo Company, Limited Cycloalkyl-substituted imidazole derivative
US9662310B2 (en) 2010-03-18 2017-05-30 Daiichi Sankyo Company, Limited Cyclopropanecarboxylic acid derivative
US9834527B2 (en) 2013-06-10 2017-12-05 Sanofi Macrocyclic urea derivatives as inhibitors of TAFIa, their preparation and their use as pharmaceuticals
WO2017170460A1 (en) 2016-03-29 2017-10-05 第一三共株式会社 Inflammatory intestinal disease therapeutic agent
WO2019054427A1 (en) 2017-09-14 2019-03-21 第一三共株式会社 Compound having cyclic structure

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
HRP20040659A2 (en) 2004-10-31
TNSN04121A1 (en) 2006-06-01
MXPA04006573A (en) 2004-10-04
CA2472238A1 (en) 2003-07-31
CN1620291A (en) 2005-05-25
PL371487A1 (en) 2005-06-13
OA12756A (en) 2006-07-03
TW200302094A (en) 2003-08-01
IL162677A0 (en) 2005-11-20
PA8563501A1 (en) 2004-08-31
JP2005520811A (en) 2005-07-14
AR038197A1 (en) 2005-01-05
AP2004003084A0 (en) 2004-09-30
EP1467731A1 (en) 2004-10-20
UY27615A1 (en) 2003-08-29
EA200400716A1 (en) 2004-12-30
KR20040077775A (en) 2004-09-06
NO20043457L (en) 2004-08-19
ECSP045200A (en) 2004-08-27
MA27167A1 (en) 2005-01-03
PE20030929A1 (en) 2003-11-05
WO2003061652A8 (en) 2004-09-10
IS7310A (en) 2004-06-14
BR0307016A (en) 2004-11-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2419633C (en) Substituted imidazoles as tafia inhibitors
WO2003013526A1 (en) Anticoagulant compounds
US6759426B2 (en) 3-(Imidazolyl)-2-aminopropanoic acids
KR20110091550A (en) Novel pyrazole-3-carboxamide derivative having 5-ht2b receptor antagonist activity
JP4533428B2 (en) Novel pyrrolidine-3,4-dicarboxamide derivatives
CN113677673B (en) Inhibitors of TRPC6
EP1467731A1 (en) 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors
US6713496B2 (en) 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids
MX2011004903A (en) Pyrrolidines.
US6949577B2 (en) Pharmaceuticals
US20020147229A1 (en) Pharmaceuticals
AU2003237012A1 (en) 3-(imidazolyl)-2-alkoxypropanoic acids as tafia inhibitors
WO2019144811A1 (en) Tetrahydroisoquinoline derivative and preparation method therefor and use thereof
JP2006527731A (en) Pyrrolidin-2-one as a factor XA inhibitor
ZA200301230B (en) Substituted imidazoles as tafia inhibitors.
JP2000109479A (en) Di-substituted maleimide compound, and its use as medicine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ OM PH PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1734/DELNP/2004

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 162677

Country of ref document: IL

Ref document number: 200400716

Country of ref document: EA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: P-575/04

Country of ref document: YU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003237012

Country of ref document: AU

Ref document number: 2472238

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/2004/006573

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004/05344

Country of ref document: ZA

Ref document number: 200405344

Country of ref document: ZA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003700059

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 534068

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: AP/P/2004/003084

Country of ref document: AP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: P20040659A

Country of ref document: HR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1-2004-501093

Country of ref document: PH

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 8329

Country of ref document: GE

Ref document number: 5666

Country of ref document: GE

Ref document number: 2003561596

Country of ref document: JP

Ref document number: 2003802599X

Country of ref document: CN

Ref document number: 1020047011370

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1200400802

Country of ref document: VN

CFP Corrected version of a pamphlet front page
CR1 Correction of entry in section i

Free format text: IN PCT GAZETTE 31/2003 UNDER (72, 75) REPLACE "MAGUIRE, ROBERT, JOHN ¢GB/GB!; PFIZER GLOBAL RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT, RAMSGATE ROAD, SANDWICH, KENT CT13 9NJ (GB)" BY "MAGUIRE, ROBERT, JOHN ¢GB/US!; PFIZER GLOBAL RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT, EASTERN POINT ROAD, GROTON, CT 06340 (US)"

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2003700059

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 2003700059

Country of ref document: EP